Owner’s Manual
2020 PILOT
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
3
WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle
.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 0 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop
100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
NOTICE
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol
3
and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 1 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 39 Airbags P. 47
2 Instrument Panel P. 79
Indicators P. 80 Gauges and Displays P. 110
2 Controls P. 135
Clock P. 136 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 139
Moonroof
*
P. 169 Panoramic Roof
*
P. 170
Adjusting the Seats P. 194 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 209
2 Features P. 243
Audio System P. 244
General Information on the Audio System P. 353
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
P. 452 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 455, 480
2 Driving P. 507
Before Driving P. 508 Towing a Trailer P. 514
Parking Your Vehicle P. 614
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 625
2 Maintenance P. 631
Before Performing Maintenance P. 632 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 635
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 658
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care
*
P. 674
Accessories and Modifications P. 683
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 685
Tools P. 686 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 687
Overheating P. 703 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 705
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 715
2 Information P. 719
Specifications P. 720 Identification Numbers P. 722
Emissions Testing P. 725 Warranty Coverages P. 727
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 2 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Contents
Child Safety P. 60 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 76 Safety Labels P. 77
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 153 Security System P. 163 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 166
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 171 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 192
Heating and Cooling
*
P. 230 Climate Control System
*
P. 235
Audio System Basic Operation P. 251, 269 Audio Error Messages P. 348
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
P. 378 Customized Features P. 426, 433
CabinTalk
TM*
P. 506
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 524 When Driving P. 526 Honda Sensing® P. 565 Braking P. 610
Refueling P. 627 Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions P. 630
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 641 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 653
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 662 Battery P. 671 Remote Transmitter Care P. 673
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance P. 676 Cleaning P. 678
Engine Does Not Start P. 695 Shift Lever Does Not Move
*
P. 699 Jump Starting P. 700
Fuses P. 709 Emergency Towing P. 714
Refueling P. 716 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 717
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 723 Reporting Safety Defects P. 724
Authorized Manuals P. 729 Customer Service Information P. 730
Quick Reference Guide
P. 4
Safe Driving
P. 33
Instrument Panel
P. 79
Controls
P. 135
Features
P. 243
Driving
P. 507
Maintenance
P. 631
Handling the Unexpected
P. 685
Information
P. 719
Index
P. 731
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 3 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❙
Gauges
(P110)
❙
Driver Information
Interface
(P111)
❙
System Indicators
(P80)
❙
ECON Button
(P549)
❙
Audio System
(P251, 269)
❙
Navigation System
*
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System OFF) Button
(P553)
❙
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) OFF Button
(P571)
❙
Heated Windshield Button
*
(P187)
❙
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
Button
(P604)
❙
Parking Sensor System Button
*
(P617)
❙
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
(P378)
❙
Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P191)
❙
ENGINE START/STOP Button
(P171)
❙
Front Seat Heater Buttons
*
(P224)
❙
Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation Buttons
*
(P225)
❙
Climate Control System
*
(P235)
❙
Heating and Cooling System
*
(P230)
❙
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
(P186)
❙
Audio/Information Screen
(P252, 270)
❙
Hazard Warning Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 4 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Headlights/Turn Signals
(P174, 175)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P178)
❙
LaneWatch
TM*
(P558)
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
*
(P543)
❙
Wipers/Washers
(P183)
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
*
(P543)
❙
Brightness Control
(P188)
❙
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P595)
❙
Horn (Press an area around .)
❙
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons
*
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons
(P455, 480)
❙
Heated Steering Wheel Button
*
(P227)
❙
ENTER Button
(P113, 248)
❙
Interval Button
(P588)
❙
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
(P580)
❙
(home) Button
(P113, 248)
❙
Audio Remote Control Buttons
(P248)
❙
MAIN Button
(P581)
❙
/ Button
(P113, 248)
3
4
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 5 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Power Window Switches
(P166)
❙
Memory Buttons
*
(P190)
❙
SET Button
*
(P190)
❙
Master Door Lock Switch
(P151)
❙
Power Tailgate Button
*
(P157)
❙
Fuel Fill Door Release Button
(P628)
❙
Door Mirror Controls
(P193)
❙
Driver’s Front Airbag
(P50)
❙
Shift Button
*
(P536)
❙
Shift Lever
*
(P534)
❙
Hood Release Handle
(P642)
❙
Glove Box
(P213)
❙
Interior Fuse Box
*
(P712)
❙
Parking Brake
(P610)
❙
Interior Fuse Box
(P711)
❙
Accessory Power Socket
(P217)
❙
USB Port
(P245)
❙
Rearview Mirror
(P192)
❙
HomeLink® Buttons
*
(P453)
❙
Passenger’s Front Airbag
(P50)
❙
Mode Button
*
(P550)
❙
Accessory Power Socket
(P217)
❙
Auxiliary Input Jack
(P246)
❙
USB Port
(P245)
❙
Auto Idle Stop OFF Button
*
(P545)
❙
Snow Button
*
(P550)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 6 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Accessory Power Socket
*
(P218)
❙
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat
(P65)
❙
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)
(P69)
❙
Third Row Seat
(P199)
❙
Second Row Seat
(P198)
❙
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat
(P71)
❙
Cargo Area Light
(P212)
❙
Side Curtain Airbags
(P56)
❙
Second Row Outer Seat Heater Buttons
*
(P226)
❙
AC Power Outlet
*
(P218)
❙
HDMI
TM
Port
*
(P381)
❙
USB Ports
*
(P246)
❙
Sun Visors
❙
Vanity Mirrors
❙
Moonroof Switch
*
(P169)
❙
Panoramic Roof Switch
*
(P170)
❙
Map Lights
(P210)
❙
Sunglasses Holder
(P222)
❙
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
(P44)
❙
Side Airbags
(P54)
❙
Seat Belts
(P39)
❙
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment
System
*
(P378)
❙
Grab Handle
❙
Coat Hook
(P221)
❙
Front Seat
(P194)
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 7 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Maintenance Under the Hood
(P641)
❙
Windshield Wipers
(P183, 658)
❙
Tires
(P662, 687)
❙
Power Door Mirrors
(P193)
❙
Headlights
(P175, 653)
❙
Front Side Marker Lights
(P175, 654)
❙
Front Turn Signal Lights
(P174, 655)
❙
Side Turn Signal Lights
*
(P174, 656)
❙
Daytime Running Lights/Parking Lights
(P175, 182, 654)
❙
How to Refuel
(P628)
❙
High-Mount Brake Light
(P657)
❙
Rear Wiper
(P185, 660)
❙
Rear License Plate Lights
(P657)
❙
Rear Side Marker Lights
(P656)
❙
Rear Turn Signal Lights
(P656)
❙
Brake/Taillights
(P656)
❙
Tailgate Outer Handle
(P161)
❙
Multi-View Rear Camera
(P625)
❙
Opening/Closing the Tailgate
(P153)
❙
Door Lock/Unlock Control
(P142)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P178, 655)
❙
Back-Up Lights
(P657)
❙
Brake/Taillights
(P657)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 8 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
9
Quick Reference Guide
Auto Idle Stop Function
*
To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator
(green) comes on. (P544)
At Automatic transmission Engine status
Deceleration
Stop the vehicle and depress the brake
pedal.
Stop
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
Start-up
Release the brake pedal.
On
Off
Restarting
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 9 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
10
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System
Ambient Meter
● The color of the ambient meter changes
to green to indicate that the vehicle is
being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
ECON Button
(P549 )
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator
(P89 )
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
The message is displayed for a few seconds when the
ECON button is pressed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 10 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
11
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving
(P33)
Airbags
(P47)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety
(P60)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(P76)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist
(P508)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts
(P39)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 11 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel
(P79)
System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator/Security
System Alarm Indicator
Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
*
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
Indicator (Green/
Amber)
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
Econ Mode Indicator
System Message
Indicator
Parking Brake and
Brake System Indicator
(Red)
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Driver Information Interface
Tachometer
M (Sequential mode) Indicator/
Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
Speedometer
Fuel GaugeGear Position Indicator/
Transmission System
Indicator
Auto Idle Stop System
Indicator (Amber)
*
/
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator (Green)
*
Gauges
(P110)
/Driver Information Interface
(P111)
/System
Indicators
(P80)
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator (Green/
Amber)
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Blind spot information
System Indicator
*
Temperature Gauge
Parking Brake and
Brake System Indicator
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
System Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Low Fuel Indicator
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) Indicator
All-wheel drive
system (AWD)
Indicator
*
Intelligent Traction
Management
Indicator
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 12 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
13
Quick Reference Guide
Controls
(P135)
Clock
(P136)
a
Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button for two seconds.
b
Select Adjust Clock, then press .
c
Rotate to adjust the hours.
d
Press to switch to minute
adjustment.
e
Rotate to adjust the minutes.
f
Press to switch to Set.
g
Press to complete clock adjustment.
Models with color audio system
These indications are used to show how to
operate the selector knob.
● Rotate to select.
● Press to enter.
To adjust time
To adjust date
a
Select , then select Settings.
b
Select System, then Date & Time.
c
Select Set Date & Time.
Models with Display Audio
d
Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
e
Select Set Date or Set Time.
f
Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting / .
g
Select Save to set the time.
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
(P171)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
3
4
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 13 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals
(P174)
Lights
(P175)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P183)
*1:Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent
wipers
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
MIST
OFF
AUTO
*1
: Wiper speed varies
automatically
INT
*2
: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Adjustment Ring
Low Sensitivity
*1
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
*2
High Sensitivity
*1
Higher speed, more sweeps
*2
(+ :
(+:
(- :
(-:
AUTO should always be turned OFF before
the following situations in order to prevent
severe damage to the wiper system:
● Cleaning the windshield
● Driving through a car wash
● No rain present
Steering Wheel
(P191)
● To adjust, push the adjustment lever
down, adjust to the desired position, then
pull up the lever back in place.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 14 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P150)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
Tailgate
(P153)
Use a forward and back kicking motion
under the center of the rear bumper to
open or close the power tailgate while
carrying the smart entry remote.
Models with Hands Free Access
1 sec.
● With all the doors unlocked, press the
tailgate outer handle and lift open the
tailgate.
● Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock
and open the tailgate when you carry the
smart entry remote.
● Press the power tailgate button on the
driver’s door or the remote transmitter to
open and close the power tailgate.
Outer Handle
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models with power tailgate
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 15 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Power Door Mirrors
(P193)
● With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
● Press the folding button
*
to fold in and
out the door mirrors.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Folding Button
*
Power Windows
(P166)
● With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button Indicator
Window Switch
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 16 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Heating and Cooling System
*
(P230)
● Toggle up and down the fan control switch to adjust the fan speed.
● Press the Mode button to select from which vents air flows.
● Toggle up and down the temperature control switch to adjust the temperature.
● Use the MAX A/C button for maximum cool setting.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control Switch
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
MAX A/C Button
(Recirculation) Button
Temperature Control Switch
(On/Off) Button
Mode Control Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 17 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
18
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System
*
(P235)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control
Button
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
A/C (Air
Conditioning)
Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
(Recirculation)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
Mode Control Button
SYNC
(Synchronization) Button
(On/Off) Button
Rear Climate Control
(P240)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the
rear climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system
on or off.
Rear Temperature
Control Buttons
/
(Rear Fan
Control) Buttons
Rear AUTO
Button
(Rear On/
Off) Button
Mode Control Button
Air flows from the rear floor vents.
Air flow from the rear console
vents and floor vents.
Air flows from the rear console vents.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 18 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Features
(P243)
Audio system
(P244)
(P251)
Models with color audio system
MENU/CLOCK Button
Selector Knob
(Day/Night) Button
(Back) Button
(Sound) Button
VOL / (Volume/Power)
Knob
Preset Buttons (1-6)
(Phone) Button
RADIO Button
/
(Skip/Seek) Buttons
MEDIA Button
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 19 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
20
Quick Reference Guide
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
(Home) Icon
(Back) Icon
(Day/Night) Icon
Audio/Information Screen
(P 269)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with Display Audio
(Eject) Button
Disc Slot
Models with Blu-ray
TM
player
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 20 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Audio Remote Controls
(P248)
●
(+ / (- Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode:
FM1/FM2/AM/USB/iPod/
Bluetooth® Audio/AUX
● / Buttons
Radio: Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
USB device/Bluetooth® Audio:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
Models with color audio system
(+
/ (- Bar
SOURCE
Button
/ Buttons
● (+ / (- Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● / / / /ENTER Buttons
Press or to select Now Playing on
the home screen of the driver
information interface, and then press the
ENTER button.
Press or to cycle through the audio
mode as follows:
Android Auto/Apple CarPlay/SiriusXM®
*
/
Rear Entertainment
*
/AUX Input/AM/
Bluetooth® Audio/Social Playlist/FM/My
Honda Music/USB/iPod/CD
*
Models with Display Audio
ENTER Button
/ / / Buttons
3
4
(+ / (- Bar
3
4
3
4
3
4
Radio: Press / to change the
preset station.
CD
*
/USB device/My Honda Music/
Bluetooth® Audio:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 21 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
22
Quick Reference Guide
Driving
(P507)
Models with electronic gear selector
Automatic Transmission
(P536)
● Select
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Park
Press the
(P button.
Used when parking or before
turning off or starting the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Pull back the
(R button.
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Press the (N button.
Transmission is not locked.
Gear Position Indicator
The gear position indicator and the
shift button indicator indicate the
current gear selection.
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Button
Indicator
● Gear selection
Intelligent Traction
Management Button
Drive/S Position
Each time you press the button, the mode
switches between Drive and S position mode.
Used for:
● Normal driving (gears change between 1st
and 9th automatically)
● Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
● Automatically changing gears between 1st
and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
● Driving in the sequential mode
D/S
Drive
S Position
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 22 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
23
Quick Reference Guide
Paddle Shifters
(P543)
● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 9th). This is useful for engine braking.
● The transmission will shift back
to automatic mode once the
system detects that the vehicle
is cruising.
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
Sequential Mode Gear
Selection Indicator
M (sequential
mode)
Indicator
When the transmission is in (D
● Holds the selected gear, and
the M (sequential mode)
indicator comes on.
● The sequential mode gear
selection is shown in the
instrument panel.
When the transmission is in
(S
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 23 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
24
Quick Reference Guide
Models with shift lever
Release Button
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of
(P.
Move the shift lever without pressing
the release button.
Press the release button to move the
shift lever.
Automatic Transmission
(P534)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Shift Lever
Intelligent Traction
Management Button
Low
●
Used to further increase engine braking.
●
Used when going up or down hills.
Drive (D4)
Press the button while the shift lever is in
(D.
Used when:
●
Going up or down hills.
D4
Button
D4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 24 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
25
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® On and Off
(P553)
● The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
system helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.
CMBS
TM
On and Off
(P571)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBS
TM
can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you
start the engine.
● To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire
Fill Assist
(P561, 708)
● The TPMS monitors tire pressure.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
● TPMS fill assist provides audible and visual guidance during tire pressure adjustment.
Refueling
(P627)
a
Press the fuel fill door
release button.
b
After refueling, wait for
about five seconds
before removing the
filler nozzle.
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or
higher
Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 25 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
26
Quick Reference Guide
Honda Sensing®
(P565)
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system
which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor
located behind the emblem and a front
sensor camera mounted to the interior side
of the windshield, behind the rear view
mirror.
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
Front Sensor
Camera
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is
behind the emblem.
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
(P568)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The
CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as
to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is
deemed unavoidable.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
(P580)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you
having to keep your foot on the brake or
the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
(P593)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM) System
(P602)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the
system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane
markings and/or leaving the roadway
altogether.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 26 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
27
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance
(P631)
Under the Hood
(P641)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the
hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can
release the lever.
c
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights
(P653)
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades
(P658)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires
(P662)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 27 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
28
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected
(P685)
Flat Tire
(P687)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire
located under the cargo area.
Indicators Come On
(P705)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start
(P695)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse
(P709)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating
(P703)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P714)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 28 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
29
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to
(P
.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
u Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(P612)
Canadian models
Models with shift lever
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 29 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
30
Quick Reference Guide
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in
the lock position. If so, open the
rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, slide the
lever up to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
●
The Auto Idle Stop
*
is in operation.
Why does a beeper sound
when I walk away from the
vehicle after I close the
door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock
operating range before the door completely closes.
u Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
(P144)
Models with walk away auto lock®
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 30 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
31
Quick Reference Guide
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●
Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●
The parking brake pedal is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Why does the gear position
automatically change to
(P
when I open the driver’s
door to check for parking
space lines when
reversing?
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●
Close the driver’s door and manually change the gear
position.
u
When opening the driver’s door
(P539)
I'm seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs
attention.Check tire pressure.
u
If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator
Comes On or Blinks
(P708)
Models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 31 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
32
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 32 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
33
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 34
Important Handling Information......... 36
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 37
Safety Checklist ................................. 38
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts ........................ 39
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 42
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 46
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 47
Types of Airbags ................................ 50
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 50
Side Airbags....................................... 54
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 56
Airbag System Indicators.................... 57
Airbag Care ....................................... 59
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 60
Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 62
Safety of Larger Children ................... 74
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 76
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 77
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 33 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
34
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 34 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
35
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the
climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the
climate control system can shut off at any time.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 35 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
36
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,
read:
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
P. 532
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 524
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 36 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
37
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
Side Curtain Airbags
11
6
7
8
8
9
10
10
11
7
Side Airbags
9
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 37 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
38
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 194
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions
P. 200
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 60
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 96
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 38 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
39
Continued
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All seven or eight seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with
emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely
while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the
retractor locks to restrain your body.
The front passenger’s second row and third row seat belts also have a lockable
retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 69
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 39 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
40
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat
belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and
the indicator will blink. After a few seconds,
the beeper will stop and the indicator will
come on and remain illuminated until the seat
belt is fastened.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 60
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 40 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
41
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front
seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal
collision, sometimes even if the collision is not
severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 41 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
42
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 194
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 42 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
43
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
Push
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 43 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
44
Safe Driving
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
■
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
3
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch Plate
Buckle
Second row bench seat
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 44 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
45
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
Third row seat
Latch Plate
Buckle
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•
When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 45 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
46
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 46 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
47
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
12
6
79108
8
8
8
11
8
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 47 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
48
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
a
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b
Two side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c
Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
d
An electronic control unit that, when the
power mode is in ON, continually
monitors information about the various
impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,
rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat
belt tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.
e
Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
f
A driver's seat position sensor. This
sensor determines the optimal force at
which the airbag will deploy in a crash.
g
Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).
h
Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i
An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
j
An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k
Safing Sensor
l
A rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 48 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
49
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 49 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
50
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 50 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
51
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 51 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
52
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 52 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
53
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver's airbag.
The front passenger's advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger's seat.
However, if you do allow a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger's
seat, note that the system will automatically
turn off the front passenger's airbag if the
sensors detect that the child is approximately
65 lbs (29 kg) or less.
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the
event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of
the driver's seating position) with a force
corresponding to the severity of the impact.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
•
Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•
Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•
Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•
Do not cover the passenger's side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 58
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 679
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 53 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
54
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 54 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
55
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 55 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
56
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the
passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there
are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 56 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
57
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface.
■ When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or
does not come on at all, have the system
checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you
don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when they are needed.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 57 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
58
Safe Driving
■ When the passenger front airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 60
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger's seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy
and the indicator will not come on.
■
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger's seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensor, such as:
•
An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•
A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
•
The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•
An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger front airbag off indicator may come
on and go off repeatedly if the total weight on the
seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 58 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
59
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-
999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-
9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 59 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
60
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 60 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
61
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 77
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 61 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 47
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position:
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 62 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations
of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly
secured forward facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations
for the forward facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 63 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
64
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 64 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in the second and third row seats. A
child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Second row bench seat
Marks
Second row captain seat
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 65 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
66
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Marks
Third row seat
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
Lower Anchors
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 66 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
67
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
3. Put the outer head restraint to it’s upper-
most position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Route the tether strap hook between the
head restraint legs, and secure the tether
strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Put the center head restraint to it’s lowest
position, then route the tether strap over
the top of the head restraint and secure the
tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
3
WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Second row bench seat
Second row seat outer positions
Third row seat outer positions
Center position
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 67 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
68
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
5. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
6. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 60
Tether Strap Hook
Second row captain seat
Anchor
All positions
Tether Strap Hook
Third row seat
Anchor
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 68 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
69
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt if it is completely retracted
it unlocks wind up into the retractor, then
try to pull it out to make sure the retractor
is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 69 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
70
Safe Driving
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 60
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 70 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
71
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each second and third row seating position. If
you have a child seat that comes with a tether
but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether
may be used for additional security.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
Second row bench seat
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward facing child seats
when using the seat belt or lower anchors.
Second row captain seat
Tether Anchorage Points
Tether Anchorage Points
Third row seat
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 71 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
72
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
■ Using a second row anchor
1. Put the outer head restraint to it’s upper-
most position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
1. Put the center head restraint to it’s lowest
position, then route the tether strap over
the top of the head restraint and secure the
tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Second row bench seat
Tether Strap Hook
Outer positions
Center position
Second row captain seat
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
All positions
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 72 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
73
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
■ Using a third row anchor
1. Route the tether strap hook between the
head restraint legs, and secure the tether
strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Third row seat
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 73 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
74
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 74 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
75
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that
the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 75 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
76
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 76 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
77
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Canadian models
Air Conditioner System
Sun Visor
U.S. models only
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 77 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
78
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 78 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
79
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 80
Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages...................... 96
Gauges and Displays
Gauges............................................ 110
Driver Information Interface ............. 111
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 79 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
80
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off if the parking brake
has been released.
• Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
• Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
• The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
• Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 707
• Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 707
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with a system related to braking
other than the conventional brake
system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
• With this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 80 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
• Comes on when you set the
power mode to ON, and goes off
when the engine starts, or after
several seconds if the engine did
not start. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five
times before it goes off.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
• Blinks when a misfire in the
engine’s cylinders is detected.
• Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 725
• Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 706
Charging System
Indicator
• Comes on when you set the
power mode to ON, and goes off
when the engine starts.
• Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
• Comes on while driving - Turn off the
heating and cooling system
*
/climate
control system
*
and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 705
Gear Position
Indicator
• Indicates the current gear
selection.
2 Shifting P. 534, 536
—
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 81 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
M (sequential
mode) Indicator/
Sequential Mode
Gear Selection
Indicator
*
• Comes on when the manual
sequential shift mode is applied.
2 Sequential Mode P. 542
—
Transmission
System Indicator
●
Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have the
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Models with
shift lever
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 82 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Transmission
System
Indicator
●
The indicated current gear selection
blinks if there is a problem with the
transmission system.
●
Avoid sudden start and acceleration, and
stop in a safe place immediately.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
All the gear positions may light for
several seconds, and go off.
●
When all the gear positions light,
immediately stop your vehicle in a safe
place.
●
Indicators go off if there is no problem.
However, even if they go off, take your
vehicle to a dealer for inspection.
●
The indicated current gear selection
or all the gear positions blink if
there is a problem with the
transmission system, and the
vehicle no longer moves.
●
Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 Emergency Towing P. 714
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
The indicated current gear selection
or all the gear positions blink if you
cannot select (P due to the
transmission system failure.
●
The engine can be activated as a
temporary measure.
2 If the Transmission System
Indicator Blinks along with the
Warning Message
*
P. 708
●
Set the parking brake when parking.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Models with
electronic gear
selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 83 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
• Comes on and the beeper sounds
if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you set the power mode to
ON.
• If the front passenger is not
wearing a seat belt, the indicator
comes on a few seconds later.
• Blinks while driving if either you
and/or the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
• The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
• Stays on after you and/or the front
passenger has fastened the seat
belt(s) - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 40
Low Fuel
Indicator
• Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.5
U.S. gal./9.5 liter left).
• Blinks if there is a problem with
the fuel gauge.
• Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
• Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
• Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
indicator on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 612
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 84 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
85
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
• Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the Auto high-beam
are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 179
—
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Blinks when VSA®, or trailer
stability assist is active.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the VSA®, hill start assist,
trailer stability assist or brake
lighting system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®),
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System P. 552
2 Trailer Stability Assist P. 521
2 Hill start assist system P. 531
●
When Trailer Stability Assist Problem
is displayed on the driver information
interface, the VSA® does not activate.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 85 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
86
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
OFF Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
— —
●
Comes on when VSA® OFF switch
is pressed.
●
Appears when Normal or Snow mode is
selected.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 553
●
Comes on when Mud/Sand mode
is selected by pressing Intelligent
Traction Management System
switch.
●
Appears when Mud mode is selected.
2 Intelligent Traction Management
*
P. 550
●
Appears when Sand mode is selected.
2 Intelligent Traction Management
*
P. 550
●
Comes on when VSA® OFF switch
is pressed.
●
Appears when Mud or Sand mode is
selected.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 553
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
• Comes on when you set the
power mode to ON, and goes off
when the engine starts.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the EPS system.
• Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 707
AWD models
AWD models
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 86 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
87
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on if the tire pressure of
any of the tires becomes
significantly low.
• Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
• Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist,
or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
• Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
is fitted with a compact spare, get your
regular tire repaired or replaced and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
• Blinks when you operate the turn
signal lever.
• Blink along with all turn signals
when you press the hazard
warning button.
• Does not blink or blinks rapidly
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 655, 656
—
High Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
— —
Lights On
Indicator
• Comes on whenever the light
switch is on, or in AUTO when the
exterior lights are on.
• If you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF while the
exterior lights are on, a chime sounds
when the driver’s door is opened.
—
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 87 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
88
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Fog Light
Indicator
*
• Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
— —
Immobilizer
System Indicator
• Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
• Blinks if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
• Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
*1
, then
select the ON mode again.
• Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
• Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
—
Security System
Alarm Indicator
• Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
• Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 163
—
Indicator
Indicator
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 88 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
89
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:AWD models
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
System Message
Indicator
• Comes on along with a beep
when a problem is detected. A
system message on the driver
information interface appears at
the same time.
• While the indicator is on, press the
(home) button, select Warnings, then
press the ENTER button to see the
message again.
• Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the driver information interface. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
• The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the ENTER
button is pressed repeatedly.
—
Econ Mode
Indicator
• Comes on when the Econ mode is
on.
2 ECON Mode P. 549
Intelligent
Traction
Management
Indicator
• Comes on when pressing the
Intelligent Traction Management
button.
2 Intelligent Traction Management
*
P. 550
*1
*1
2WD models
AWD models
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 89 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
90
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator
(Green)
*
• Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is
in operation. The engine
automatically shuts off.
2 Auto Idle Stop
*
P. 544
—
Auto Idle Stop
System Indicator
(Amber)
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
— —
• Comes on when Auto Idle Stop
system has been turned off by the
Auto Idle Stop OFF button.
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
P. 545
• Blinks if there is a problem with
the Auto Idle Stop system.
• Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
All-wheel drive
(AWD)
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the AWD system.
●
Blinks when the differential
temperature is too high.
●
Stays on constantly - The engine drives
the front wheels only in this state. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place, change to (P, and idle the engine
until the indicator goes off. If the
indicator does not stop blinking, take
your vehicle to a dealer.
2 Intelligent Variable Torque
Management (i-VTM4
TM
) AWD
System
*
P. 560
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 90 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
91
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the LKAS.
• Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green)
• Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
P. 593
—
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 91 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
92
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Road Departure
Mitigation
(RDM) Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to
ON, then goes off.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the RDM system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.
• Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the heating and cooling system
*
/
climate control system
*
to cool down the
camera.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
• Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back on
after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 92 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
93
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with ACC.
• Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator (Green)
• Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
P. 580
—
Collision
Mitigation
Braking
System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Indicator
• Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to
ON, then goes off.
• Comes on when you deactivate
the CMBS
TM
. A driver information
interface message appears for five
seconds.
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBS
TM
.
• Stays on constantly without the
CMBS
TM
off - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 568
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 93 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
94
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Collision
Mitigation
Braking
System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Indicator
• Comes on when the CMBS
TM
system shuts itself off.
• Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the heating and
cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
to cool down the camera. The system
activates when the temperature inside
the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
• Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
• When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop
your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off
dirt using a soft cloth. Indicator may take
some time to go off after the radar
sensor is cleaned.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you clean the sensor cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 609
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 94 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
95
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Blind spot
information
System Indicator
• Stays on while blind spot
information system is turned off.
—
• Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of
sensor.
• Comes on while driving - Remove the
obstacle in the vicinity of the sensor.
2 Blind spot information System
*
P. 555
• Comes on if there is a problem
with the system.
• Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with Blind spot information System
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 95 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
96
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the
ENTER button to see the message again with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely
closed.
• Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.
• Appears when the hood is opened. • Close the hood.
• Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. • Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 705
• Appears when the washer fluid is low
*
. • Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 652
• Appears while you are customizing the settings and
the transmission is in other than (P.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with color audio system
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 96 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
97
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when the temperature of the transmission
is starting to get too hot.
• The performance of the vehicle may be reduced.
• Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and
allow the system to cool down.
• Appears if the battery charge becomes low. • Charge the battery.
• Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Checking the Battery P. 671
• Appears along with the charging system indicator
when the battery is not charging.
• Turn off the heating and cooling system
*
/climate
control system
*
and rear defogger to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 705
• Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
• Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver
Information Interface P. 637
• Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 703
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 97 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
98
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when there is a problem with the power
tailgate system.
• Manually open or close the power tailgate.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Appears when the starter system has a problem. • As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Appears when the steering wheel is locked. • Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
U.S.
Canada
Models with power tailgate
U.S.
Canada
Canadian models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 98 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
99
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
• Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 171
• Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle.
• Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the
vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 173
• Appears when the remote battery becomes weak. • Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 673
• Appears if the remote battery is too weak to start the
engine or the key is not within operating range to
start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
• Bring the remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP
button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 696
●
Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while the vehicle is moving.
2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 697
●
Appears three seconds after the To Start, Hold
Remote Near Start Button, then To Start Engine
messages appeared sequentially.
●
Unless you bring the smart entry remote in front of the
ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not
appear.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 696
• Appears if there is a problem with the cooling
system.
• Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 99 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
100
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.
• Appears while driving - The headlights may not be
on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
• Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system.
• Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the
beeper does not stop even after you clean the area,
have the system checked by a dealer.
• Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors.
• Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is
safe to park.
• Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system.
• Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
• Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the push
button starting system.
• Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
• Appears if there is a problem with the Auto high-
beam.
• Manually operate the headlight switch.
• If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
• Appears when the area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
• May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.)
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
comes back on after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
Models with LED headlights
Models with parking sensor system
Models with parking sensor system
Models with smart entry system
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 100 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
101
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with
a vehicle in front of you.
• Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
P. 568
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when ACC has been automatically
canceled.
• You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+
button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.
• ACC cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears if the VSA® or traction control function
operates while ACC is in operation.
• ACC has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high
for you to set ACC.
• Reduce the speed, then set ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive
vehicle speed.
• Reduce the speed, then reset ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for
you to set ACC.
• Raise the speed, then set ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 101 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
102
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low
vehicle speed.
• Raise the speed, then reset ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 580
• Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
• Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 593
• Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
• Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 602
• You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
• Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
• Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 102 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
103
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if
selected by customization.
• If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 80
• Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too
high and some driver assist systems cannot be
activated.
• Use the heating and cooling system
*
/climate control
system
*
to cool down the camera.
• Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and
the systems are activated normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
• Appears if the area around the front sensor camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from
detecting a vehicle in front.
• May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.)
• When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in
a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
does not disappear even after you cleaned the area
around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
●
Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover
and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
●
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.)
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a
safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
does not disappear even after you clean the sensor
cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 609
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 103 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
104
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the transmission system temperature
is too high. The vehicle does not operate properly.
●
Stop in a safe place in (P.
●
Let the engine idle until the message disappears.
• Appears when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
• Appears when the engine does not restart
automatically due to the following reason:
• The hood is open.
• There is a problem in the system that disables Auto
Idle Stop.
• Follow the normal procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
• Appears when you attempt to change to another
gear position with the transmission in (P and the
engine OFF.
• To select another gear position while in (P, the engine
must be ON.
• Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while
driving.
• Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake,
then restart the engine. If the message disappears,
continue driving.
●
Appears when you try to change the gear position
after the position has automatically been changed to
(P with the driver’s door open and the driver’s seat
belt unfastened.
●
Press the park button if you leave the vehicle.
Models with electronic gear selector
Models with Auto Idle Stop
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 104 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
105
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if the vehicle is stationary and the
transmission is put into (N, the driver's seatbelt is
unfastened, and the brake pedal is released, as there
is a risk that the vehicle might roll unexpectedly.
• Press the (P button before releasing the brake pedal
when idling, parking or exiting the vehicle.
2 Shift Operation P. 538
• Appears when the engine stops without the
transmission in (P, and does not restart
automatically.
• Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop
activates.
• If you want to set the power mode to ON, change the
gear position to (P.
• If you want to start the engine, follow the normal
procedure.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
• Appears when you change to (N, then release the
(N button.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 540
• Appears when you press and hold (N button for
more than two seconds.
• Disappears when you set the gear position to other
than (N.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 540
• Appears when car wash mode is not available due to
hot transmission.
• When transmission is too hot, car wash mode may not
be available. Let the engine idle and cool down
transmission.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 540
• Appears when you try to change the gear position
without depressing the brake pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button.
Models with electronic gear selector
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 105 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
106
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when you try to change the gear position
without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select
a shift button.
• Appears when the (P button is pressed while the
vehicle is moving.
• Appears if you change the gear position to
(R while
the vehicle is moving forward, or to (D while the
vehicle is reversing.
• Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before
operating the select button.
• Appears when you set the power mode to ON
without fastening the driver’s seat belt.
• Appears when you change the gear position after
(P has been automatically selected with the driver’s
door open, the driver’s seat belt unfastened, then
the brake pedal is released.
• Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.
2 Shift Operation P. 538
• Appears when you press the (P button but it is not
engaged due to low ATF temperature.
• Depress the brake pedal until this message disappear.
• Appears when depressing the accelerator pedal
while the gear position is in
(N.
• Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. When
driving, depress the brake pedal and change the gear
position.
Models with electronic gear selector
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 106 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
107
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop Display ON has
been selected from the customization menu.
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate for
some reason.
• Appears when the engine restarts automatically.
• Appears when the battery temperature is around
14°F (−10°C) or lower.
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate
because the climate control system is in use, and the
difference between the set temperature and actual
interior temperature becomes significant.
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate
because the engine coolant temperature is too low
or high.
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate
because the battery charge level is low.
2 Auto Idle Stop
*
P. 544
Models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 107 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
108
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate
because the pressure to the brake pedal is not
enough.
• Depress the brake pedal firmly.
• Appears when Auto Idle Stop Display ON has
been selected from the customization menu.
• Appears when the system is under the following
conditions while Auto Idle Stop activates:
- The climate control system is in use, and the
difference between the set temperature and actual
interior temperature becomes significant.
- The humidity in the interior is high.
- The battery charge level is low.
• The engine restarts automatically in a few seconds.
2 Auto Idle Stop
*
P. 544
Models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 108 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
109
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P.
●
Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P.
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s
door while the engine is running by remote engine
start.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 528
Models with shift lever
U.S. models
Canadian models
Models with remote engine starter
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 109 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
110
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the fuel gauge, temperature gauge, and related indicators. They are
displayed when the power mode is set to ON.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
■
Fuel Gauge
■
Temperature Gauge
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 703
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 110 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
111
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface
The driver information interface displays the speedometer, tachometer, odometer,
trip computer, outside temperature
*
, and other gauges. It also displays important
messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■
Speedometer
■
Tachometer
1Speedometer
You can set the speedometer and the displayed
measurements to read in either mph and km/h.
2 Units P. 120
1Tachometer
You can turn on or off the tachometer display.
2 Show Tachometer P. 124
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 111 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
112
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers
that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
(U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature
display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F
or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems
incorrect.
Use the driver information interface
*
or audio/
information screen
*
to correct the
temperature.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
■
Odometer
Odometer
■
Outside Temperature
*
1Outside Temperature
*
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Outside Temperature
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 112 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
113
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Press the (home) button, then press the / button to scroll to the content
you want to see. Press the ENTER button to see detailed information.
*1: Models with color audio system
*2: Models with Display Audio
■
Accessing Content
1Accessing Content
To go back to the previous screen, press the
*1
/
*2
(back) button.
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using
the driver information interface.
2 Arrange Apps P. 123
2 Show/Hide Apps P. 122
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 113 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
114
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
(Home) Button
/ Button
3
4
*
*
Press or .
3
4
P. 117
P. 122
P. 115
P. 119
P. 117
P. 120
P. 123
P. 118
P. 120
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
(Home) Button
/ Button
3
4
P. 121
*
*
P. 119
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 114 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
115
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Press the ENTER button to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
■
Trip Computer
ENTER Button
ENTER
Trip Computer A
Trip Computer B
Distance
Range
Average Fuel
Economy
Instant Fuel
Economy
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
ENTER Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 115 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
116
Instrument Panel
■ Distance
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting distance
To reset the Distance, display it and then press and hold the ENTER button until the
Distance is reset to 0.0.
■ Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each Distance in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a Distance is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
■ Instant fuel economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
1Distance
Switch between Distance A and Distance B by
pressing the ENTER button.
1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
You can change when the average fuel economy is
reset.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 116 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
117
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Display Audio shows you turn-by-turn
directions to your destination.
When the navigation system is not providing
driving guidance, an image of a compass
appears in the driver information interface.
2 Refer to the navigation system
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 96
■
Navigation
1Navigation
Turn-by-turn directions will be shown on the driver
information interface only when your android phone
is connected to Android Auto
TM
.
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn
display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with Display Audio
Compass
Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions
Models with Display Audio
Models with navigation system
■
Warnings
1Warnings
The Warnings app is dynamic and will only appear
when there are active warnings. If there are no
Warnings, this app will not be shown.
(Example)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 117 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
118
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Shows the current condition of the tire
pressure and the remaining oil life.
■ Tire Pressure
Shows the tire pressure of each tire.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
with Tire Fill Assist P. 561
■ Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance
Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 635
■
Maintenance
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 118 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
119
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
The indicators on the display show the
amount of torque being transferred to the
right front, left front, right rear, and left rear
wheels.
2 Intelligent Variable Torque Management
(i-VTM4
TM
) AWD System
*
P. 560
Shows the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 455
■
AWD Torque
*
■
Phone
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 119 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
120
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Enables you to set the speedometer and the
displayed measurements to read in either mph
or km/h.
Press and hold the ENTER button. Each time
you do this, the unit will change from mph to
km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation
screen will appear for a few seconds.
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 251
■
Units
■
Now Playing
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 120 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
122
Instrument Panel
You can show or hide the meter contents.
Select the content you wish to show or hide,
then press the ENTER button.
u Repeat it if you want to show or hide
more than one app.
■
Show/Hide Apps
1Show/Hide Apps
You cannot hide apps with the icon on the right
side.
Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization
does not restore these settings to their original state.
You can also add the Android Auto, Apple
CarPlay, Sirius XM
*
, My Honda Music, USB, AM,
FM, Bluetooth Audio, Social Playlist, AUX Input,
CD
*
and Rear Entertainment
*
apps.
Models with Display Audio
Shown
Press ENTER
Hidden
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 122 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
123
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Change the settings to your liking.
■ Arrange Apps
You can change the order of the apps on the home screen.
1. Press the / button to select Arrange
Apps, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the / button to select the icon
you want to move, then press the ENTER
button.
3. Press the / button repeatedly to move
the icon to your desired position, then press
the ENTER button.
■
Settings
1Arrange Apps
Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization
does not restore these settings to their original state.
3
4
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 123 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
124
Instrument Panel
■ Show Tachometer
You can show or hide the tachometer.
Press the / button to select Show
Tachometer, then press the ENTER button.
u The tachometer appears when the check
box is checked.
1Show Tachometer
Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization
does not restore these settings to their original state.
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 124 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
125
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Vehicle Customization
Use the driver information interface to customize certain vehicle features.
How to customize
First, make sure the vehicle is at a complete stop and that the power mode is set to
ON. Next, press the (home) button, then press the / button to select
Settings. Finally, press the ENTER button.
Models with color audio system
1Vehicle Customization
To customize other features, press the / button.
2 List of customizable options P. 128
2 Example of how to customize a setting
P. 131
Change to
(P before you attempt to change a
customized setting.
3
4
3
4
/ Button
Scroll through the menu
or items.
3
4
Button
Goes back to the previous
screen.
ENTER Button
Enters the selected
item.
Button
Goes to home
screen.
Driver Information Interface:
Goes to Settings.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 125 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
126
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Customization flow
Press the (home) button.
ENTER
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Language Selection
Adjust Alarm Volume
Meter Setup
ENTER
Settings
Arrange Apps
Show Tachometer
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
Vehicle Customization
ENTER
P. 123
P. 124
Interior Light Dimming Time
Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON
ENTER
Lighting Setup
3
4
ENTER
ENTER
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Driver Assist System
Setup
3
4
3
4
Auto Light Sensitivity
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 126 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
127
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Default All
ENTER
ENTER
Auto Door Lock
Security Relock Timer
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Door Setup
Exit
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
Walk Away Auto Lock
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 127 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
128
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English
*1
/Français/Español
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how the distance and
average fuel economy of trip computer A is reset.
When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how the distance and
average fuel economy of trip computer B is reset.
When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset
*1
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes the volume setting for buzzers, warnings,
turn signals, and other alerting systems.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel Efficiency
Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes the distance at which CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.
ON/OFF
*1
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
ON/OFF
*1
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 128 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
129
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto OFF
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto Interior
Illumination
Sensitivity
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto Headlight ON
With Wiper ON
Changes the settings for the wiper operation when
the headlights automatically come on while the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position.
ON
*1
/OFF
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 129 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
130
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Shift
From P/OFF
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors When
Shifted To Park/All Doors When
Ignition Switched OFF/OFF
Key And Remote
Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door
*1
/All Doors
Walk Away Auto Lock
Changes the settings for the auto lock function
when you walk away from the vehicle.
ON/OFF
*1
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON
*1
/OFF
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening a door.
90sec/60sec/30sec
*1
Default All —
Cancels customized changes you have made or
restores them to their default setting.
Cancel/Set
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 130 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
131
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
■ Example of how to customize a setting
Below are steps that explain how to change the reset timing for trip A from the
default setting (manual) so that it resets automatically when the vehicle is fully
refueled.
1. Press the (home) button and then the
/ button to select Settings, then
press the ENTER button.
2. Press the / button to select Vehicle
Customization, then press the ENTER
button.
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 131 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
132
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
3. Press the / button to select Meter
Setup, then press the ENTER button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.
4. Press the / button to select “Trip A”
Reset Timing, then press the ENTER
button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Fully Refueled, IGN
OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Press the / button to select When
Fully Refueled, then press the ENTER
button.
u The SETUP “When Fully Refueled”
screen appears, then the display returns
to the customization menu screen.
3
4
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 132 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
133
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
6. Press the / button until Exit appears
on the display, then press the ENTER
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
Vehicle Customization screen, then press
the (home) or (back) button to
return to the home screen.
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 133 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
134
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 134 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
135
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 136
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 139
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength
*
....................................141
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 142
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 149
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 151
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 152
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 153
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 163
Security System Alarm...................... 163
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 166
Moonroof
*
........................................ 169
Panoramic Roof
*
............................... 170
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 171
Turn Signals..................................... 174
Light Switches.................................. 175
Fog Lights
*
...................................... 178
Auto High-Beam .............................. 179
Daytime Running Lights ................... 182
Wipers and Washers ........................ 183
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button ........................................... 186
Brightness Control ........................... 188
Driving Position Memory System
*
.... 189
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 191
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 192
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 193
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats ...................................... 194
Rear Seats........................................ 204
Armrest ........................................... 207
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights .................................. 209
Interior Convenience Items .............. 213
Heating and Cooling
*
....................... 230
Climate Control System
*
.................. 235
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 135 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
136
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power
mode in ON.
■ Using the MENU/CLOCK button
1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button
for two seconds.
2. Select Adjust Clock, then press .
3. Rotate to adjust the hours.
4. Press to switch to minute adjustment.
5. Rotate to adjust the minutes.
6. Press to switch to Set.
7. Press to complete clock adjustment.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
1Using the MENU/CLOCK button
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
To change the setting between 12h and 24h:
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Clock Format, then press .
4. Rotate to select 12h or 24h, then press .
You can also access to the clock adjustment mode by
pressing and holding the MENU/CLOCK button.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 426
Models with color audio system
Models with color audio system
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 136 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
137
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/
information screen
1. Select , then select Settings.
2. Select System.
3. Select Date & Time.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust time:
6. Select Set Time.
7. Selecting / .
u AM/PM icon can be switched to each
other either by selecting / , or by
directly touching the icon.
u When you customize the clock display to
24 hour clock, AM/PM icon is not
displayed.
2 Customized Features P. 433
8. Select Save to set the time.
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed on the upper right corner of the display or
the Clock icon on the home screen.
1. Touch the clock on the display.
The clock screen of the select face-type appears.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Date & Time Settings.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
6. Select Set Date or Set Time.
7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting / .
8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with Display Audio
3
4
Models with Display Audio
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 137 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
138
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
To adjust date:
6. Select Set Date.
7. Selecting / .
8. Select Save to set the date.
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 138 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
139
Continued
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and
tailgate. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock all the doors
and tailgate.
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release
knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
smart entry remote until it clicks.
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 163
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the
keys:
•
Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•
Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
•
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the smart
entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 528
Models with remote engine start
■
Built-in Key
Models without
smart entry system
Models with smart
entry system
Models with smart entry
system and power tailgate
Release Knob
Built-in Key
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 139 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
140
Controls
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 140 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
141
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Controls
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the
engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
Models with smart entry system
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 141 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
142
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors and the
tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80
cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate
outer handle.
■
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
Except U.S. LX models
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you unlock
the doors and tailgate.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors and tailgate relocked: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 209
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry
system, the doors and tailgate will automatically
relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 142 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
143
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the door lock button on a front door or
the tailgate.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock;
and the security system sets.
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while
someone else with the remote is within range.
•
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
•
If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door
sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond
by unlocking the doors.
•
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
•
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
•
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
Door Lock Button
Door Lock
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 143 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
144
Controls
■ Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle while
carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors and tailgate are closed, and the smart
entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m)
radius of the outside door handle.
Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote
and close door(s).
1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then
lock.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the audio/information screen.
Turning ON auto lock function using the audio/
information screen, shall only activate the function in
remote transmitter that was used to unlock the
driver's door.
2 Customized Features P. 433
After the auto lock function has been activated, when
you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range,
the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to
flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed.
Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock
function will not activate:
•
The remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe buzzer will not sound.
•
The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed.
uThe buzzer will sound.
The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 5 feet (1.5 m)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 144 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
145
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function.
• With the smart entry remote on you, move
out of the auto lock function operation
range.
• Open any door.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
If equipped, the user must wait until the power
tailgate fully closes before the auto lock function will
be activated.
The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
•
The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
•
A door or the hood is not closed.
•
The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
•
The smart entry remote is not located within a
radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle
when you get out of the vehicle and close the
doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
•
The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle
through a window.
•
You are located too close to the vehicle.
•
The smart entry remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a
door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper
sounds once.
Models with power tailgate
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 145 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
146
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All doors and the tailgate unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate outer handle:
u The tailgate unlocks and opens
*
.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 158
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
The light flash, beeper, and unlock settings can be
customized using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 433
You can also unlock and open with the power
tailgate
*
.
2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 158
Outer
Handle
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 146 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
147
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and tailgate lock, and the security system
sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE
OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 673
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 147 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
148
Controls
If the lock or unlock button of the smart entry remote does not work, use the key
instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using
the key, you can lock the door without it.
■ Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward
a
or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b
, and close the door.
■ Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when
the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
■
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
Lock
Unlock
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 148 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
149
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 149 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
150
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using
the driver information interface
*
or audio/information screen
*
.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 151
Inner Handle
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 150 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
151
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using
the master door lock switch, all the other doors and
the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 151 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
152
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain
condition is met.
■ Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15
km/h).
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors and tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the driver
information interface.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 152 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
153
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 76
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to
put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo
area when closing the tailgate.
When you are storing or picking up cargo from the
cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking
motion under the center of the rear bumper for
hands free access
*
, while the engine is idling, do not
stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get
burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.
3
WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate
that is being opened or closed can be
seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the
tailgate before opening or closing it.
Models without power tailgate
All models
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 153 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
154
Controls
The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the
remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control
panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot
under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access
*
.
The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in
(P.
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
NOTICE
Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is
being automatically opened or closed.
Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while
in operation can deform the tailgate frame.
When operating the power tailgate, make sure there
is enough space around your vehicle. People near the
tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or
closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if
children are around.
The power tailgate may not open or close under the
following conditions:
•
You start the engine while the tailgate is
automatically opening or closing.
•
The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.
•
The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.
•
The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
3
WARNING
Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in
the path of the tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear before closing
the power tailgate.
Models with power tailgate
Models with power tailgate
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 154 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
155
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
Controls
Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
Use a forward and back kicking motion under
the center of the rear bumper to open or close
the power tailgate while carrying the smart
entry remote.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and a
beeper sounds once, then the tailgate
begins to move.
■
Using the Hands Free Access
*
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
If you close the power tailgate with all the doors
locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.
1Using the Hands Free Access
*
During rain or in other instances when the vehicle
becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect
your foot motion.
When performing work on or around the rear section
of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close
the tailgate.
To prevent this from happening, select Customized
Features on the audio/information screen and then
select OFF for the feature.
2 Customized Features P. 433
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long,
the power tailgate does not open or close.
This function will not operate if you don't have the
smart entry remote on you. Please make sure you
have the smart entry remote on you.
The duration of the kicking motion should be
approximately one second.
1 sec.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 155 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
156
Controls
Press the power tailgate button for more than
one second to operate when the power mode
is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
■ Customizing when to open the tailgate
Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the
default setting.
When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.
2 Customized Features P. 433
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are
locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.
If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse
while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be
disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you
manually close the tailgate.
Installing aftermarket components other than
genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate
may prevent it from fully opening or closing.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you
get your cargo in and out.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before
you start the vehicle.
The beeper sounds when you start driving while the
power tailgate is still open, or closing.
Power
Tailgate
Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 156 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
157
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
Controls
To open or close the power tailgate, press the
power tailgate button for about one second.
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
■
Using the Power Tailgate Button
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening
or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the
direction. The beeper sounds three times.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully
closes.
Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the
tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you
touch either sensor when you are trying to close the
tailgate.
Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp
object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the
power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.
Power Tailgate Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 157 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
158
Controls
If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for
no longer than one second, the tailgate opens
automatically.
u The beeper sounds.
u If you want to open the tailgate
manually, press the button for more than
one second.
2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate
P. 153
If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you
do not have to unlock the tailgate before
opening it.
To close the tailgate, press the outer handle
again while the tailgate opening.
If you press the outer handle again while the
power tailgate is moving, it will reverse
direction.
■
Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or smart
entry remote in the cargo area before closing the
tailgate.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
You can change the power tailgate operation setting
on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Outer
Handle
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 158 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
159
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
Continued
Controls
Press the button on the tailgate to close the
power tailgate.
u The beeper sounds.
If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
■
Using the Tailgate Inner Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 159 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate
*
160
Controls
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully
opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on
the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.
■
Auto-Closer
■
Power Tailgate Fall Detection
1Auto-Closer
The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press
the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is
closing.
Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power
tailgate is latching.
Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you
manually close the tailgate and let it latch
automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands
around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.
1Power Tailgate Fall Detection
If you try to manually close the power tailgate
immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate
fall detection may be activated.
Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait
until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from
the power tailgate when it is in motion.
If the power tailgate fall detection constantly
activates, consult at a dealer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 160 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
161
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Continued
Controls
Opening/Closing the Tailgate
When all the doors are unlocked or press the
tailgate unlock button on the remote
transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.
Press the tailgate outer handle and lift open
the tailgate.
If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you
do not have to unlock the tailgate before
opening it.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
■
Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or smart
entry remote in the cargo area before closing the
tailgate.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
Models with smart entry system
Outer
Handle
Models with smart entry system
Inner Handle
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 161 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
162
Controls
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the
tailgate.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using
the remote transmitter or smart entry remote, when
closing, the tailgate locks automatically.
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 162 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
163
Continued
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system
*
.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is
opened before the power mode is set to ON.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the
transmission is taken out of
(P or the hood is opened before the power mode set
to ON.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
Automatic transmission models with electronic gear selector
Automatic transmission models with shift lever
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 163 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
164
Controls
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system
*
. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The hood is closed.
• All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or smart entry system
*
.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system
*
, or the power mode is set to ON. The security
system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•
Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•
Opening the hood with the hood release.
•
Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter or
smart entry system
*
.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 164 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
165
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or
set the power mode to ON.
■
Panic Mode
Panic
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 165 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
166
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors.
The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power
window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in,
indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s
seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
Driver’s Window
Switch
Indicator
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 166 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
167
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Continued
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows and moonroof
*
stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function
Close
Open
■
Opening Windows and the Moonroof
*
with the Remote
Unlock
Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 167 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
168
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof
*
at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
■
Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof
*
with the Key
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 168 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
169
Controls
Moonroof
*
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in
the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
push the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
■
Using the Moonroof Switch
1Opening and Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function
causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is
almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening Windows and the Moonroof
*
with the Remote P. 167
2 Opening/Closing Windows and the
Moonroof
*
with the Key P. 168
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
Models without panoramic roof
Models with panoramic roof
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 169 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
170
Controls
Panoramic Roof
*
Opening/Closing the Sunshade
You can operate the sunshade when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the
front of the ceiling to open and close the sunshade.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The sunshade automatically opens or closes all
the way. To stop the sunshade midway, touch
the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■
Using the Sunshade Switch
1Opening/Closing the Sunshade
The sunshade can be operated for up to 10 minutes
after you set the power mode to OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the sunshade to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
sunshade is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes.
The sunshade can be opened or closed to adjust the
amount of light that enters the cabin.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the sunshade on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the sunshade before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 170 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
171
Continued
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1: Canadian models
*2: U.S. models
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting
low, the engine may not start when you push the
ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not
start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 696
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the
engine is running.
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.
Operating Range
Canadian models
Automatic transmission models
with shift lever
Automatic transmission models
with electronic gear selector
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off.
The steering wheel is locked
*1
.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Press the button without the
transmission in
(P.
Press the button with the
transmission in
(P.
Press the button.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
Without pressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
The button blinks (in red).
All electrical components can be
used.
Put the transmission into
(P.
*2
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 171 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
172
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beeper sounds.
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Canadian models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 172 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
173
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the driver information interface notifies the
driver inside that the remote is outside of the
vehicle.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
■
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 173 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
174
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Right Turn
Left Turn
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 174 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
175
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Continued
Controls
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
■ Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:
• The transmission is in
(P.
• The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to
OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you
do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights
come on automatically when:
• The transmission is taken out of
(P and the
parking brake is released.
• The vehicle starts to move.
■
Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 87
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic
headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts
the vertical angle of the high/low beam headlights. If
you find a significant change in the vertical angle of
the headlights, there may be a problem with the
system. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models without automatic headlight adjusting system
Models with automatic headlight adjusting system
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking,
side marker, tail, and rear
license plate lights
U.S. models
Canadian models
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Canadian models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 175 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
176
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
When the light switch is in AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
The headlights come on when you unlock a
door in dark areas with the headlight switch in
AUTO.
u Once you lock the door, the headlights
will go off.
■
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
Models with automatic
intermittent wipers
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Canadian models
U.S. models
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 176 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
177
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver’s door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Max
High
Mid
Low
Min
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates during the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 426
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 177 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
178
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
*
Controls
Fog Lights
*
When the parking lights or the headlights are
on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog
lights.
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 178 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
179
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Continued
Controls
Auto High-Beam
The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the
lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at
night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high
beam depending on the situation.
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator
comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.
• The power mode is in ON.
• The light switch is in AUTO.
• The lever is in the low beam position.
• The headlights have been automatically
activated.
• It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have
been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.
• Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam system does not always operate
in every situation. This system is just for assisting the
driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch
the headlights between high beam and low beam
manually if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The range and the distance at which the camera can
recognize varies depending on conditions
surrounding your vehicle.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to
the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
•
Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
•
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
•
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
•
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
■
How to Use the Auto High-Beam
Front Sensor Camera
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Light Switch
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 179 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
180
Controls
■ Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low
beam based on the following conditions.
■ Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,
follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-
beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever:
Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about
one second while driving.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the
high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will
come on.
Using the light switch:
Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the
lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:
All of the following conditions must
be met before the high beams turn
on.
●
Your vehicle speed is 45mph
(72 km/h) or more.
●
There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicle with headlights
or taillights turned on.
●
There are few street lights on the
road ahead.
One of the following conditions
must be met before the low beams
turn on.
●
Your vehicle speed is 30 mph
(48 km/h) or less.
●
There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle with headlights or
taillights turned on.
●
There are many street lights on
the road ahead.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system
may not switch the headlights properly or the
switching timing may be changed. In case of the
automatic switching operation does not fit for your
driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
•
The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
•
Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
•
Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating
the road ahead.
•
The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
•
The road is bumpy or has many curves.
•
A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or
oncoming direction.
•
Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.
•
A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
•
The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
•
The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low
beam when:
•
Windshield wipers are operating.
•
The camera has been detected a dense fog.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 180 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
181
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or
on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the
vehicle is stationary.
To turn the system off:
With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever
toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.
After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks
twice, release the lever.
To turn the system on:
With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever
toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds.
After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks
once, release the lever.
■
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
•
Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed toward the camera.
•
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield or Auto High-
Beam Cannot Operate: Clean Windshield
message appears:
•
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system
does not operate until you turn the system on.
Park in a safe place before turning the system off or
on.
AUTO Position
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 181 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
182
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 182 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
183
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
, LO,
HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.
■ Adjusting wiper operation
*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust wiper
operation.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
*1: Models with manual intermittent operation
*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
■
Windshield Wipers/Washers
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting (+) and the LO setting become
the same.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield
*
to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
*
MIST
INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
OFF
LO
: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 183 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
184
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■ Auto sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
■
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
NOTICE
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situations in order to prevent severe
damage to the wiper system:
•
Cleaning the windshield
•
Driving through a car wash
•
No rain present
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low sensitivity
High sensitivity
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 184 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
185
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ Washer ( )
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.
■ Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to
(R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
■
Rear Wiper/Washer
INT: Intermittent
OFF
ON
Washer
Front Wiper Operation Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent) Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 185 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
186
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger automatically switches off
after 20 minutes.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C),
the heated door mirror may activate automatically for
10 minutes when you set the power mode to ON.
Models with heating and cooling system
Models with climate control system
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 186 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
187
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluHeated Windshield Button
Controls
Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield at the wiper park area and
along the driver side edge of the windshield
when the power mode is in ON.
The heated windshield will automatically
switch off after 15 minutes.
Canadian models
1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use
the system for a long period when the engine is
idling. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When the outside temperate is below 39°F (4°C), the
heated windshield may automatically activate. The
system deactivates itself once the outside temperate
reaches 43°F (6°C).
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 187 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
188
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Press the
(+ button.
Dim: Press the (- button.
You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the display
while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
When it is bright outside and the headlight
integration with the wiper is activated, the
instrument panel brightness does not change.
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness
when the exterior lights are on, press the
(+ button
until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper
sounds.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
(+ Button
(- Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 188 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
189
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
Continued
Controls
Driving Position Memory System
*
You can store two driver’s seat (except for power lumbar) and door mirror positions
with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, or smart
entry system, door mirrors adjust to one of the two preset positions and the seat
adjusts to retracted positions of one of the two preset positions automatically.
The seat will move to the stored position when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY.
When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which
remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
The driver’s seat moves rearward depending
on the set seating position once you
• Stop the vehicle.
• Put the transmission in
(P.
• Turn the engine off.
• Then open the driver’s door.
Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY
position, the driver’s seat moves to the
DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.
1Driving Position Memory System
*
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the automatic seat and door mirrors adjustment
function.
2 Customized Features P. 433
The driver’s seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/
OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 433
System Operation
The system will not operate if:
•
The vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
•
Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion.
•
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
•
The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 189 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
190
Controls
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the
desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button
(1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
u You will hear two beeps, and the
indicator light on the button you pressed
stays on once the seat and the outside
mirror positions have been memorized.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat and the door mirrors will
automatically move to the memorized
positions. When it has finished moving, you
will hear the beep, and the indicator light
stays on.
■
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
•
You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
•
You readjust the seat position and door mirror
before the double-beep.
•
You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2SET Button
■
Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you:
•
Press the SET button or memory button (1 or ( 2.
•
Adjust the seat position or door mirrors.
•
Put the transmission into a position other than (P.
Memory Buttons
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 190 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
191
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Lever
To lock
To adjust
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 191 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
192
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror and
power door mirror reduce the glare from
headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button
to turn this function on and off. When
activated, the AUTO indicator comes on.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seats P. 194
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
and Power Door
Mirrors
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
and Power Door Mirrors
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the
transmission is in
(R.
Sensor
Auto Button
Up
Down
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 192 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
193
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
■ Folding door mirrors
*
Press the folding button to fold in and out the
door mirrors.
If activated, either side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the transmission into
(R; this improves close-
in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle
when backing up. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you take
the transmission out of
(R.
To activate this feature, set the power mode
to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left
or right side.
Selector
Switch
Adjustment Switch
Folding
Button
*
■
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
*
Selector
Switch
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 193 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
194
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seats
*
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
*
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 194 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
195
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Continued
Controls
■ Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
*
Press the front: To increase the entire
lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.
Lumbar
Support
Adjustment
Switch
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 195 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
196
Controls
■ Adjusting the front manual seats
*
1Adjusting the front manual seats
*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 196 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
197
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 197 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
198
uuAdjusting the SeatsuSecond Row Seats
Controls
Second Row Seats
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
1Second Row Seats
3
WARNING
An unsecured seat or seat-back can move
out of position or collapse without warning
if there is sudden acceleration or stop or in
a crash.
A seat or seat-back that suddenly moves or
collapses can result in severe injury or
death.
Always make sure all seats and seat-backs
are securely locked into position before
driving.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to change
the angle.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 198 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
199
uuAdjusting the SeatsuThird Row Seats
Controls
Third Row Seats
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
1Third Row Seats
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull the strap to change
the angle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 199 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
200
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■
Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head
Restraint Positions
1Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint
Positions
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•
Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•
Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 200 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
201
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
A passenger sitting in the second and third
row center seating position should adjust the
height of their head restraint to an
appropriate position before the vehicle begins
moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button(s).
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release buttons which are
located on the both legs at the same time, and pull the restraint up and out.
■
Changing the Second Row
*
/Third Row Center Seat Head
Restraint Position
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
Except third row outer seat head restraints
Front and second row outer seat head restraint
Second row/third row center seat head restraint
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 201 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
202
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button(s). Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
A passenger in the third row seating position
should put the head restraint in the upright
position before the vehicle begins moving.
To fold down the head restraint:
Pull the strap.
To put the head restraint back in the
upright position:
Pull up the head restraint and push rearward
until it latches.
■
Folding Down the Third Row Outer Head Restraint
Strap
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 202 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
203
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 203 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
204
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
Pressing the button on the seat-back, or seat
cushion tilts the second row outer seat's seat-
back forward.
u The whole seat slides forward.
Pulling the lever on the seat side, and the
second row outer seat’s seat-back forward.
u The whole seat slides forward.
Pulling up on the strap also tilts the seat-back
forward.
■
Third Row Seat Access
1Third Row Seat Access
The button is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
When you enter the third row seat, be careful not to
trip over the second row seat belt.
Models with button type
Models with lever type
Strap
All models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 204 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
205
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the second row seat to make room
for cargo.
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the
ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 44
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest
position. Put the armrest back into the seat-
back.
4. Pull up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever.
To return the seat to the original position, pull
up the seat-back in the upright position.
■
Folding Down the Second Row Seat
1Folding Down the Second Row Seat
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 58
The front seats must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the second row seats as they
fold down.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat
cushion are securely latched back into place before
driving.
Make sure the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in
the holding slot.
Models with bench seat
Models with bench seat
Lever
All models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 205 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
206
Controls
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the third row seat to make room
for cargo.
■ To fold down the seat
1. Pull the strap on the seat-back fully.
u The head restraint tilts downward.
2. Push the seat-back forward while pulling
the strap.
■ To return the seat to the original position
1. Pull the seat-back up with the strap pulled.
2. Pull the head restraint up to its original position.
■
Folding Down the Third Row Seat
1Folding Down the Third Row Seat
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the third row seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.
Strap
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat-back and head restraints are
securely latched back into place before driving.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 206 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
207
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Continued
Controls
Armrest
Pull down the armrest.
Pull the armrest all the way down, then pull it
up to the desired angle.
■
Using the Front Seat Armrest
Models with adjustable armrest
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 207 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
208
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Pull down the armrest.
Pull down the armrest of the center backrest.
■
Using the Second Row Seat Armrest
Models with captain seat
Models with bench seat
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 208 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
209
Continued
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the tailgate and doors are open or
closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When the tailgate or any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the tailgate or the doors are open or
closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the
following situations:
•
When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
•
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Vehicle Customization P. 125
2 Customized Features P. 433
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•
When you lock the driver’s door.
•
When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
•
When you set the power mode to ON.
If you leave any of the tailgate or doors open in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off
after about 15 minutes.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the
interior light on for an extended length of time when
the engine or power system is off.
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
Models without panoramic roof
Door Activated Position
Off
On
Models with panoramic roof
Door Activated Position
Off
On
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 209 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
210
Controls
■ Front
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses or buttons.
■
Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not go off when you press the lens.
Models without panoramic roof
Models with panoramic roof
Models without panoramic roof
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 210 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
211
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls
■ Second and third row
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses when the front interior
light switch is in the door activated position.
1Map Lights
When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the rear map
light will not go off when you press the lens.
Models without panoramic roof
Models with panoramic roof
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 211 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
212
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls
■ ON
The light comes on regardless of whether the
tailgate is open or closed.
■ Tailgate activated
The light comes on when you open the
tailgate, and goes off when closed.
■ OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the
tailgate.
■
Cargo Area Light
Off
On
Tailgate Activated Position
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 212 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
213
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the lever to open the glove box. You can
lock the glove box with the built-in key.
To open the console compartment, press the
button to unlock the lid, and then slide it
rearward.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
To Lock
■
Console Compartment
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 213 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
214
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ Console Tray
Slide the tray when you use the console
compartment.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 214 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
215
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■ Door side beverage holders
Are located on the both of front and rear door
side pockets.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Front
Rear
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 215 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
216
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ Second row bench seat beverage
holders
*
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■ Second row captain seat beverage
holders
*
■ Third row seat beverage holders
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 216 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
217
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
■ Console panel
Open the lid and the cover to use it.
■ Console compartment
Pull the handle and open the cover to use it.
■
Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 217 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
218
Controls
■ Cargo area
*
Open the cover to use it.
The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running.
Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance
slightly, turn it 90° clockwise, then push it all
the way.
■
AC Power Outlet
*
1AC Power Outlet
*
NOTICE
Do not use the AC power outlet for electric
appliances that require high initial peak wattage,
such as cathode-ray tube type televisions,
refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for
devices that process precise data, such as medical
equipment, and that require an extremely stable
power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for
up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or
less.
Continued use of any electric appliance/device
exceeding these ratings may result in damage to the
appliance/device.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 218 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
219
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the green
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
2. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will go off.
u If the device is not located on the charge
area correctly, the green indicator light
will blink.
■
Wireless Charger
*
1Wireless Charger
*
In order to use safely:
•
Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device.
•
Do not open the charger case.
•
Do not use the charger if it malfunctions.
Contact your dealer.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may
come in contact with the charge pad
surface.
Green
Indicator
Charging Area
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 219 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
220
Controls
■ When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Slow Blink
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Move the device to the
center of the charging
area where is
located.
Fast Blink The wireless charger is faulty.
Turn the vehicle off
and back on. If the
indicator still blinks,
contact a dealer.
1Wireless Charger
*
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the wireless charger function.
2 Customized Features P. 433
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s
manual that came with the compatible device you
want to charge.
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
machines such as watches can go wrong.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
•
The device is already fully charged.
•
The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
•
You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV
station, electric power plant, or gas station.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 220 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
221
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle
of both sides. Pull it down to use it.
■
Coat Hooks
1Wireless Charger
*
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
•
All the doors and the tailgate are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
•
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 221 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
222
Controls
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■ Conversation mirror
*
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror.
Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it
back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.
■
Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 222 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
223
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the
way. Use the hooks to hang it.
■
Integrated Sunshades
*
1Integrated Sunshades
*
Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully
closed. Using the shade while a window is open can
unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting
anyone sitting near the window.
Tab
Hook
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 223 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
224
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting of front seat
heaters is maintained.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one
level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The
elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 224 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
225
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters or ventilation.
Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation
button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator
on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting of front seat
heaters and ventilations is maintained.
■
Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
*
1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
*
Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation
even in LO when the engine is off. Under such
conditions, the battery may be weakened, making
the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one
level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The
elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 225 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
226
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
■
Second Row Outer Seat Heaters
*
1Second Row Outer Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by
one level at a time until the rear seat heater shuts off.
The elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 226 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
227
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the right side of the
steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
Heated Steering Wheel
*
1Heated Steering Wheel
*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
Indicator
Heated Steering Wheel Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 227 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
228
Controls
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor
can be used to install a net for securing items.
The cargo hooks on both sides of the cargo
area can be used to hang a light items.
■
Tie-down Anchors
Anchor
Anchor
■
Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any
items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 228 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
229
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid.
■ Storing items on the lid at the bottom
This is convenient when storing a tall item.
1. Pull the handle and open the lid.
2. Pull the lid towards you until it disengages
from the support rods.
3. Push the far end of the lid down to the
bottom of the under-floor storage area,
then lower the other end.
■
Under-floor Storage Area
1Storing items on the lid at the bottom
The lid can be flipped over and placed in either upper
or lower position. This allows for storage of dirty
items, or items that may damage the carpet lining of
the lid.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 229 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
230
Controls
Heating and Cooling
*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
MODE Control Button
Change airflow.
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Dashboard
vents
Fan Control Switch
Adjusts the fan speed.
MAX A/C Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from the dashboard vents,
and switches the mode to recirculation.
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Press to cool the interior or dehumidify while heating.
Windshield Defroster
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the defroster vents at the
base of the windshield, and
switches the mode to fresh air.
Temperature Control Switch
Adjusts the interior temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in
normal situations.
(On/Off) Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 230 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
231
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
switch.
2. Press the mode button to select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control switch.
■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the mode button to select .
3. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
4. Press the button (indicator on).
■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control switch.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
3. Press the mode button to select .
4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control switch.
■
Heating
1Heating
When you select , the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 231 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
232
Controls
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
switch.
2. Press the mode button to select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control switch.
4. Press the A/C button (indicator on).
■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the MAX A/C button (indicator on).
■
Cooling
1To rapidly cool down the interior
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 232 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
233
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the button.
3. Press the button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 233 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
234
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
Use the system when the engine is running and the heating and cooling is
operating.
1. Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button.
2. Press the RR SETTINGS button.
u The system switches to the rear control mode for 10 seconds. The REAR
indicator appears on the display.
u The system adjusts the rear heating and cooling system.
3. To turn off the rear heating and cooling system, press the REAR (Rear On/
Off) button.
■
Using the Rear Heating and Cooling From the Front Panel
Back of the center
console vents
Rear floor
vents
Back of the center
console and floor
vents
RR SETTINGS
Button
REAR (Rear On/Off) Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 234 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
235
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
*
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control switch.
3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and
only the blower remains active.
If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press
the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel idle-stop.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may operate at low speed for a while after the
AUTO button has been pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
All models
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor,
and back of the
center console vents
Dashboard and
back of the center
console vents
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
(Recirculation) Button
Fan Control Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature Control
Switch
(On/Off) Button
(Windshield Defroster)
Button
SYNC (Synchronization) Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 235 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuClimate Control System
*
uUsing Automatic Climate Control
236
Controls
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioner system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the
climate control system between on and off. When
turned on, the system returns to your last selection.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the
engine restarts automatically.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 236 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
237
uuClimate Control System
*
uUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch
over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in
recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from
humidity. This impedes visibility.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 237 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
238
uuClimate Control System
*
uSynchronization Mode
Controls
Synchronization Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, front passenger side
and rear seats in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch.
Press the SYNC button to return to synchronization mode off.
1Synchronization Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronization mode.
When the system is in synchronization mode off, the
temperature for the driver, front passenger, and rear
seats can be set separately.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 238 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
239
uuClimate Control System
*
uRear Climate Control System
Continued
Controls
Rear Climate Control System
Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is
operating.
1. Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button.
2. Press the RR SETTINGS button.
u The system switches to the rear control mode for 10 seconds. The REAR
indicator appears on the display.
■
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel
1Rear Climate Control System
LOCK appears on the rear control panel while the
rear lock is on.
If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear
control panel is disabled. LOCK SYNC appears on the
rear control panel.
1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel
Press the REAR LOCK button to turn the rear lock
mode on and off.
While the rear lock mode is on, the rear control panel
is disabled.
uREAR LOCK appears on the display.
REAR LOCK
Button
(Rear On/Off) Button RR SETTINGS Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 239 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuClimate Control System
*
uRear Climate Control System
240
Controls
3. Press the AUTO button.
u The rear system changes to AUTO mode.
u The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain
the set rear temperature. Change the temperature if necessary.
4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the (Rear On/Off) button.
Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is
operating.
1. Press the (Rear On/Off) button.
2. Press the Rear AUTO button.
3. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control button.
4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the button.
■
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel
1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel
When the REAR LOCK button on the front control
panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger
compartment can be controlled independently.
Rear floor
vents
Rear console
vents and
floor vents
Rear console
vents
/
(Rear Fan
Control) Buttons
(Rear On/Off) Button
Rear Temperature
Control Buttons
Rear AUTO Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 240 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
241
uuClimate Control System
*
uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 241 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
242
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 242 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
243
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 244
USB Ports......................................... 245
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 246
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 247
Audio Remote Controls.................... 248
Audio System Basic Operation..... 251, 269
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
*
....................................... 348
iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 350
Android/Apps .................................. 352
Models with Display Audio
General Information on the Audio
System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
................. 353
Recommended CDs
*
....................... 354
Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB
Flash Drives.................................... 356
Honda App License Agreement........ 358
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto................................. 370
About Open Source Licenses............ 372
License Information
*
........................ 373
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment
System
*
........................................... 378
Customized Features................ 426, 433
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
.. 452
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 455, 480
CabinTalk
TM*
...................................... 506
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 243 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
244
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio
*
service. It can also
play audio CDs
*
, WMA/MP3/AAC files
*
, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone, iPad
*
and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons
*
and knobs on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface
*
.
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
*
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 353
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
*
SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM
Radio, Inc.
*
Video CDs and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPad, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
After you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, you
can use the audio system for up to 30 minutes per
driving cycle, or until opening the driver's door.
However, whether you can continue using the audio
system depends on the battery condition. Repeatedly
using this feature may drain the battery.
Models with Blu-ray
TM
player
Models with Display Audio
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
*1
*2
*1: Models with color audio system
*2: Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 244 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
245
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports
Continued
Features
USB Ports
■ On the console panel
The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files
on a USB flash drive, connecting a cell phone,
and charging devices.
The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files and connecting compatible
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure
to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning
Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for
Android Auto, the USB cables should be
certified by USB-IF to be compliant with
USB 2.0 Standard.
■ In the console compartment
The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging
devices.
1USB Ports
•
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
•
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
•
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk
drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
•
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does
not output 2.5A unless requested by the device.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play
music even if you have connected a music player to it.
USB charge
In the console compartment
On the console panel
Models
with
color
audio
system
Models
with
Display
Audio
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
In the console compartment
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 245 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
246
Features
■ On the back of the console
compartment
*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging
devices.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect devices.
1. Open the cover.
2. Connect a device to the input jack using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1USB Ports
These ports are for battery charge only. You cannot
play music even if you have connected a music player
to them.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port
may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.
On the back of the console compartment
On the back of the console
compartment
USB Ports
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch to another mode, press the RADIO or
MEDIA button.
To return to the AUX mode, press the MEDIA
button.
To switch to another mode or return to the AUX
mode, select the audio source icon.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 246 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
247
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 247 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
248
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodBluetooth®
AudioAUX
(+/(- (Volume) Bar
Press
(+: To increase the volume.
Press (-: To decrease the volume.
/ Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Models with color audio system
/
Buttons
SOURCE Button
(+/(-
Bar
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 248 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
249
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
(+/(- (Volume) Bar
Press (+: To increase the volume.
Press
(-: To decrease the volume.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Press the (back) button to go back to the
previous screen or cancel a command.
Press the (home) button to go back to the home
screen of the driver information interface.
You can show or hide the audio mode icons, or
change the order of the icons.
2 Show/Hide Apps P. 122
2 Arrange Apps P. 123
Models with Display Audio
ENTER Button
(+/(-
Bar
// /
Buttons
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 249 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
250
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
/ / / /ENTER Buttons
• When selecting the audio mode
Press or to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver
information interface, and then press the ENTER button.
Press or : To cycles through the audio modes as follows:
Android Auto/Apple CarPlaySiriusXM®
*
Rear Entertainment
*
AUX
InputAMBluetooth® AudioSocial PlaylistFMMy Honda MusicUSB/
iPodCD
*
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
• When listening to a CD
*
, iPod, USB flash drive, My Honda Music, or Bluetooth®
Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
3
4
3
4
3
4
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 250 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
251
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available modes include wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play mode choices include scan,
random, repeat, and so on.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press the button, then adjust the brightness using .
u Each time you press the button, the mode switches between the daytime
mode, nighttime mode and off mode.
Models with color audio system
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Menu Items
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 136
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 254
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 256
2 Display Setup P. 257
2 Customized Features P. 426
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any
audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
One of the operating systems used in this unit is
eCos.
For software license terms and condition, visit their
website (eCos license URL:
http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html)
For source code disclosure and other details
regarding eCos, visit:
http://www.hondaopensource2.com
(Back) Button
Selector Knob
MENU/CLOCK Button
(Day/Night) Button
(Sound) Button
Menu Display
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 251 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
252
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■
Switching the Display
Audio/Information Screen
Audio
Clock/Wallpaper
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 252 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
■ Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 253 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
254
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Ports P. 245
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate to select Import, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The selected picture is displayed.
7. Press to save the picture.
8. Press to select OK.
9. Rotate to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
•
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•
Up to 255 files can be selected.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 254 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press .
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
6. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 255 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
256
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the (sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then
press .
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
(Sound) Button
TRE is selectable.
BAS
TRE
FAD
BAL
SVC
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
Speed-sensitive
Volume Compensation
SUBW
Sub woofer
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 256 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 257 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button
Press to select a band.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to search up and
down the selected band for a station
with a strong signal.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 258 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
■ Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Update List, then press .
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press .
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
reset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6
stations each.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 259 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
260
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA
button.
2 USB Ports P. 245
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 260 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press to display the iPod music list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen to is
displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 350
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 261 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
262
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected
category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 262 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Ports P. 245
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 263 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
264
Features
1. Press to display a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 353
Files in WMA and AAC format protected by digital
rights management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 350
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 264 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 265 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
266
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 461
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones, visit
automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
MEDIA
Button
Press to select
the Bluetooth
Audio mode
(if
connected).
VOL/
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn
the audio
system on
and off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
MENU/CLOCK
Button
Press to
display the
menu items.
Audio/Information ScreenBluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone
is connected to HFL.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change files.
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume playing a file.
Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause playing a file.
Selector Knob
Turn to change groups.
Press to display a music search list. Press,
and then turn to select an item. After
that, press again to make your selection.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to
the previous
display.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 266 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the
Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA
button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio
system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Play Button
Pause Button
MEDIA Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 267 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
268
Features
1. Press to display the music search list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 268 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
269
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
: Select to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 270
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.
: Select to change the audio/information
screen brightness.
Select once and select or to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you select , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
Models with Display Audio
(Day/Night) Icon
(Home) Icon
(Back) Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 269 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
270
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Using the audio/information screen
Select to go to the home screen.
Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
■
Switching the Display
1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen Operation
•
Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
•
Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
•
You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
•
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Home Screen
Models without
navigation system
Models with
navigation system
(Home) Icon
All Apps
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 270 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 480
■ Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset Trip A/B, select Reset.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip
A Reset Method or Trip B Reset Method.
■ Clock
Displays the clock.
■ System Updates
Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 284
■ FM/AM/Sirius XM
*
/CD
*
/USB/Bluetooth Audio/AUX Input/My Honda
Music/Social Playlist
Displays the each audio information.
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 433
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 271 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Navigation
*
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ HondaLink
Displays the HondaLink® screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 333
■ Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 341
2 Android Auto P. 344
■ Messages
Displays the text message screen.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 480
■ CabinTalk
*
Displays the CabinTalk screen.
2 CabinTalk
TM*
P. 506
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 272 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■ Rear Entertainment
*
Displays the rear audio screen.
2 Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
P. 378
■ AT&T Hotspot
*
Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen.
■ File Manager
Displays the file manager screen.
2 File Manager P. 290
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 273 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
274
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the front
USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 245
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Clock Faces.
5. Select Add More.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.
6. Import a desired picture.
2 How to Transfer a File P. 290
u The display will return to the Clock Faces
screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
displayed on the driver information interface.
•
The file name must be fewer than 255 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, or WebP.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No Data message appears.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 274 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the screen.
5. Select Save.
u The display will return to the clock screen.
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Select .
2. Select Clock.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select Delete Photos.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.
5. Delete a picture.
2 How to Delete a File P. 293
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 275 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
276
Features
■ To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages. You cannot add any
more pages.
Select to go directly back to the first page of the
home screen from any page.
Swipe
Icon
>
Icon
<
Current page position
<
>
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 276 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ To add app icons on the home screen
App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select .
2. Select All Apps.
3. Check the box of the app you want to add.
u The app icon will be added on the home
screen.
1To add app icons on the home screen
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 451
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 451
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.
Check Box
All Apps
Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 277 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
278
Features
■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 278 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the Hide icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons on the home screen
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to
Hide icon.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 279 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
280
Features
■ To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen
Three shortcut icons for accessing apps displayed on the home screen are displayed
in the upper left area of the screen. You can replace any of these shortcut icons with
an icon of your preference.
1. From the home screen, select and hold the
icon that you want to store in the upper left
of the screen.
u The screen will switch to the
customization screen.
2. Drag the icon over to the upper left of the
screen and drop it over the icon that you
want to replace.
u The new icon will appear in place of the
old icon.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and
drop to preset
icon.
Preset
Icons
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 280 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
1. Select the system status icon.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select or the system status icon to close
the area.
■
Status Area
System
Status Icon
Status Area
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 281 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
282
Features
Some of the audio system’s apps can be updated wirelessly when connected via Wi-
Fi, or Bluetooth® in conjunction with the HondaLink® app installed on a compatible
iOS or Android device. If an update is available, a notification is displayed at the top
of the screen with the respective app’s update icon.
■ To update an app:
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
update message on the header area.
2. Select the system status icon, and then
select the software update notification
from the list.
■
Updating Apps
1Updating Apps
The wireless updates are for the apps on the audio
system only.
To update compatible apps on your iPhone or
Android phone, please visit the App Store or Google
Play Store, respectively.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 282 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
3. Select Download.
4. Select OK.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful. Select OK.
u Restart the engine for the update to be
applied.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 283 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
284
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
System Updates
The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB
device.
■ Wireless connection mode setup
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Connection Setup.
5. Select Change Mode.
6. Select Network, then Save.
u The display returns to the network list.
7. Select an access point from the network list,
then Connect.
u If the audio system requires a password,
enter a password.
■
How to Update Wirelessly
1Wireless connection mode setup
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
do not need the wireless connection mode setup.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 284 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
■ How to update
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/
information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via Wireless.
4. Select Download Now.
u A notification appears on the screen.
Notification
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 285 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
286
Features
5. Select Install Now or Install while
Vehicle OFF.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
1How to update
If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user
turns the vehicle back on after the update has been
completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild
the applications, during which time the Honda logo
will be displayed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 286 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
287
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
■ Automatic download settings
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Auto Download.
5. Select the access point, then Allow.
■ View an update result
Use the following procedure to confirm the update result.
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Update Result.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 287 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
288
Features
■ Download the update files from the server
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect a USB device into the front USB
port.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB
device.
2 USB Ports P. 245
5. Remove the USB device from the USB port.
6. Connect the USB device into your
computer, and then download the update
files.
u Follow the link to download the required
software update files. Refer to
https://usb.honda.com for instructions.
■
How to Update with a USB Device
1How to Update with a USB Device
A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space
or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update
files from the USB before starting the USB update
process.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 288 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
289
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
■ Update the audio system
1. Select .
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect the USB device with the update
files into the USB port.
u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Ports P. 245
5. Select Install Now or Install while
Vehicle OFF.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
1Update the audio system
If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user
turns the vehicle back on after the update has been
completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild
the applications, during which time the Honda logo
will be displayed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 289 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
290
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Features
File Manager
Allows you to transfer image or audio files to the audio system with a USB device.
1. Connect a USB device into the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 245
2. Select , then select All Apps.
3. Select File Manager.
4. Select Transfer Content.
To transfer a selected file:
5. Select Select Files to Transfer.
■
How to Transfer a File
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 290 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
291
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Features
6. Select the file or folder you want to
transfer.
7. Select OK.
8. Select Transfer.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the
display will return to the File Manager
screen.
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail
on the upper right of the screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 291 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
292
Features
To transfer all files:
5. Select Transfer All Content.
6. Select Transfer.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the
display will return to the File Manager
screen.
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail
on the upper right of the screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 292 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
293
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Continued
Features
1. Select , then select All Apps.
2. Select File Manager.
3. Select Delete Content.
To delete a selected file:
4. Select Select Files to Delete.
■
How to Delete a File
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 293 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
294
Features
5. Select the file or folder you want to delete.
6. Select OK.
7. Select Delete.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the deletion is successful. Then, the
display will return to the File Manager
screen.
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail
on the upper right of the screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 294 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
295
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Features
To delete all files:
4. Select Delete All Content.
5. Select Delete.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the
display will return to the File Manager
screen.
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail
on the upper right of the screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 295 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
296
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select .
2. Select an audio source icon.
3. Select Sound.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Center / Subwoofer Volume: Center
*
,
Subwoofer
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader
• Audio Zones
*
: Driver Only, Front Only,
Rear Only, Full Vehicle
• Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)
• DTS Neural Surround
*
: DTS Neural
Surround
TM
1Adjusting the Sound
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following
procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Center /
Subwoofer Volume and Balance / Fader, select
Reset.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 296 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
297
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Continued
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select Save.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
To reset the settings, select Reset.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 297 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
298
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select the source icon
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 298 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering
wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
The system recognizes only certain commands.
Available voice commands.
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 300
• Close the windows and moonroof
*
.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
■
Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 299 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
300
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When the (talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.
The system only recognizes the commands
on the following pages, at certain screens.
Free form voice commands are not
recognized.
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Voice Portal Screen
■ Phone
This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone command, the screen will change
the dedicated screen for the voice
recognition of the phone.
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Category>
Phone commands are not available if using
Apple CarPlay.
■ Audio
When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.
• FM
• AM
• USB
• Sirius XM
*
• My Honda Music
■ Navigation
*1
The screen changes the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Voice Help
Readout voice guidance for Help on current
screen.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 300 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
301
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the phone.
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Category>
■
Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.
■ FM Commands
• Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
■ AM Commands
• Tune to <530-1710> AM
■ Sirius XM Commands
*
• Channel <1-999>
• Channel <station name>
■ USB/My Honda Music Commands
• Play Artist
• Play Album
• Play Genre
• Play Playlist
• Play Music
• Play Song
■
Audio Commands
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 301 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
302
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Icons
Select or to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a
strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Tune Icon
Select to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the radio frequency directly.
Audio/Information Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong
signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display preset 5 onwards.
>
Settings Icon
Select whether to tune to
HD Radio
TM*
automatically.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 302 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
303
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Station List
1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the or button on the steering wheel or
select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset
memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
3
4
Models with HD Radio
TM
feature
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 303 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
304
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or .
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or .
■
Scan
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 304 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
305
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select HD Radio Channels.
2. Select the channel number.
■
HD Subchannel
Models with HD Radio
TM
feature
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 305 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
306
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Channel Icons
Select or to the previous or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Category Icons
Select or to display and select a
SiriusXM® Radio category.
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for
preset memory. Select and hold
the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display
preset 5 onwards.
>
Album Art
Station Art
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 306 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
307
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select All Channels or Within Category.
■
To Change the Tune Mode
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the or button on the steering wheel or
select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off by the
following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Start.
3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or
select More and then select Category List.
3
4
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 307 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
308
Features
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
■
Preset Memory
1Preset Memory
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
TuneMix:
The multi-channel preset function can be turned on
or off by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select TuneMix.
3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select
Replace Preset.
If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix,
and then select the channel you want to delete.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 308 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
309
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select Channel List.
2. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
3. Select the channel.
■
Listening to Featured Channels
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.
To switch the sorting method, select Number, Name
or Category on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 309 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
310
Features
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.
■ Returning to real-time broadcast
Select and hold .
■
Replay Function
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
(D): Play/Pause icon
Audio/Information Screen
(C) (B)
(A)
(D)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 310 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
311
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
your favorite teams.
■ To set up a favorite team
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Favorite Teams.
4. Select + Add Favorite Team.
5. Select a team.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
5. Select Notifications.
6. Select On.
7. Select a favorite team.
■
Live Sports Alert
1Live Sports Alert
The sports alert function is active during SiriusXM®
mode only.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 311 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
312
Features
You can receive traffic and weather information.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
3. Select Selected City.
4. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Reset Location.
■
Traffic and Weather Information
1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function is active
during SiriusXM® mode only.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 312 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
313
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is
about to start.
■ To view a channel schedule
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
3. Select a program.
4. Select Set Program Alert.
5. Select Just Once or Every Time.
■
Channel Schedule
1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
1To set up an alert message
The alert function is active during SiriusXM® mode
only.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next
time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 313 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
314
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
You can change settings for the alert function.
■ To enable the alert function
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select ON or OFF.
■ To remove an alert
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Alerts Set.
4. Select on the alert you want to delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.
■
Manage Program Alert
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 314 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
315
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Scan Mode.
3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
■
Scan
1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
TuneScan
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured Favorites
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScan
TM
and Featured Favorites
TM
are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 315 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
316
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
*
Features
Playing a CD
*
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA,
or AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
(Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Audio/Information Screen
Disc Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into
the CD slot.
Play/Pause Icon
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 316 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
317
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
*
Features
If there is a folder(s) on a CD:
1. Select Browse.
2. Select Current Playlist, or Folders then a
folder.
3. Select a track.
If there is no folder on a CD:
1. Select Track List.
2. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a CD
*
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Selected file cannot be
played on this system, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•
When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•
When you change the audio mode to CD.
•
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Browse Screen
Track List Screen
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 317 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
*
318
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
■ Scan
Select Scan.
u If there is a folder(s) on a CD, you can
select Current folder or First Track in
All Folders.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
■ Random/Repeat
Cycles through the modes as follows:
Random
(off) (highlighted)
Repeat
(off)
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Select Scan Mode, and then select the following:
First Track in All Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC):
Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each
of the main folders.
Current folder: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all
files in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in
random order.
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all
files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 318 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
319
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the USB
mode.
2 USB Ports P. 245
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Cover Art
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 319 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
320
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 350
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/
USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the
phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 320 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
321
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
Select or .
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 321 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
322
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Ports P. 245
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 322 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
323
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 353
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays The selected file cannot
be played on this system, then skips to the next
file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 350
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 323 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
324
Features
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
■ Random/Repeat
Select or .
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Random/Repeat
Random in Category: Plays all files in the
current category in random order.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 324 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
325
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
Continued
Features
Playing My Honda Music
My Honda Music plays audio files that have been imported from a USB flash drive.
Your audio system supports audio files in either MP3, WMA, or AAC
*1
format.
2 File Manager P. 290
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 325 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
326
Features
1. Connect a USB device into the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 245
2. Select More.
3. Select Import Files to My Honda Music.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.
4. Transfer an audio file to your audio system.
2 How to Transfer a File P. 290
■ How to delete an audio file
1. Select More.
2. Select Delete Files from My Honda Music.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.
3. Delete an audio file.
2 How to Delete a File P. 293
■
How to Transfer an Audio File
1How to Transfer an Audio File
If there is no audio file in your audio system, the
system will automatically proceed to step 3 after
connecting a USB device.
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 353
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 326 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
327
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing My Honda Music
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays The selected file cannot
be played on this system, then skips to the next
file.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 327 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
328
Features
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
■ Random/Repeat
Select or .
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Random/Repeat
Random in Category: Plays all files in the
current category in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 328 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
329
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
*1: Depending on the
Bluetooth
® device you connect, this function may not be displayed.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone
will be unavailable. However, you can have a second
previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by
selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
Audio/Information
Screen
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to
the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
Repeat Icon
*1
Select to repeat the current
file.
Random Icon
*1
Select to play all files in
the current category in
random order.
Play/Pause Icon
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 329 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
330
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play/pause icon.
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting
Change Device.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 330 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
331
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist
Continued
Features
Playing Social Playlist
The Honda CabinControl
TM
smartphone app allows users to share audio files from
their devices to Social Playlist.
Unfortunately, the driver cannot select the audio files from the audio/information
screen. The driver can play in order of their choice only if they individually select each
song in the queue. The driver cannot rearrange the order of the playlist.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 338
1Playing Social Playlist
For more information, check the Honda
CabinControl smartphone app instruction manual.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to
the previous display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Push to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
Audio/Information
Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current
file.
Random Icon
Select to play all files in
random order.
Remove Icon
Select to remove
the file from the
playlist.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 331 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
332
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist
Features
1. Select .
2. Select Social Playlist.
3. Select Queue.
To play a file on the playlist:
u Select the file.
To remove a file from the playlist:
u Select on the file.
To clear the playlist:
u Select Clear, and then select Request
Songs to reload a playlist.
To check the connected device:
u Select Device List.
■
How to Edit the Playlist
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 332 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
333
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 338
2 Phone Setup P. 485
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
■ To enable the HondaLink® service
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink®
service.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows
again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never
show again.)
■
To Connect to HondaLink® Service
1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to
the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even
without a Wi-Fi connection.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 333 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
334
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
■ To link with HondaLink®
You may see the connection guide screen
after launching HondaLink® when there is no
connection available.
■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
■ Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.
■
HondaLink® Menu
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 334 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
335
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
■ Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
2. A notification is continuously displayed in
the header area until the new message is
read.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Notification
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 335 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
336
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
3. Select the system status icon to see the
messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 336 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
337
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for
roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button.
u Connection to the operator begins.
2. Talk to the operator.
u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the
audio/information screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.
■
Operator Assistance
*
1Operator Assistance
*
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving
during operator assistance.
If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the
Operator Assistance.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Subscription.
5. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.
LINK
Button
Audio/information screen
when connected to the
HondaLink® operator.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 337 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
338
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has cell
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi.
5. Select Change Mode.
6. Select Network or HotSpot, then Save.
u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select
Network Options or HotSpot
Options.
u Select the access point you want to
connect to the system.
7. Select Connect.
u Enter a password for the access point,
and select OK.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list.
8. Select to go back to the home screen.
■
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make
sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point
(tethering) mode.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 338 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
339
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
■
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi
connection again after you boot your phone.
iPhone users
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 339 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
340
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Features
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
■
Using Siri Eyes Free
1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
While driving we recommend only using Siri through
the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.
(Back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appears.
Appears when Siri is
activated in Siri Eyes Free
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 340 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
341
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB
port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to
make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Ports P. 245
■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the
USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports
located in the console compartment and on the back
of the console compartment
*
will not enable Apple
CarPlay operation.
2 USB Ports P. 245
While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only
made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a
call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or
detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 342
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Home screen
Apple CarPlay icon
Apple CarPlay menu screen
Go back to the Apple
CarPlay menu screen
Select the Honda icon
to go back to the
home screen
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 341 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
342
Features
■ Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port, use the
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay
Enable: Allows this consent.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Connections settings menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Models with navigation system
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Select HOMESettingsConnectionsApple
CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 342 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
343
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri:
•
What movies are playing today?
•
Call dad at work.
•
What song is this?
•
How’s the weather tomorrow?
•
Read my latest email.
•
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
(Talk) Button:
Press and hold to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 343 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
344
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port,
Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can
use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation),
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a
tutorial will appear on the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 245
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 346
1Android Auto
To use Android Auto, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto
phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the
USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports
located in the console compartment and on the back
of the console compartment
*
will not enable Android
Auto operation.
2 USB Ports P. 245
To directly access the Android Auto phone function,
press Phone on the home screen.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 346
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 344 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
345
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear
just when they’re needed.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
: Go back to the
home screen
Android Auto icon
6
Models with navigation system
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 345 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
346
Features
d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto.
To switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home Screen.
f Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port, Android
Auto is automatically initiated.
■ Enabling Android Auto
Enable: Allows this consent.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Connections settings menu.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked.
When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will
need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is
possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came
with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android
Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOMESettingsConnectionsAndroid
Auto
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 346 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
347
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
•
Reply to text.
•
Call my wife.
•
Navigate to Honda.
•
Play my music.
•
Send a text message to my wife.
•
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) Button:
Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 347 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
348
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
*
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
Problem ejecting disc from
the player. Contact Honda
dealer to fix this problem.
Disc stuck in player • Contact a dealer and the player needs to be replaced.
There is a problem with the
player. Eject and re-insert the
disc. If this does not work, try
another disc. If the error
continues, contact Honda
dealer.
Focus error
Unsupported disc error
Mechanical error
Servo error
DRM file access
Error file access
• Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
• Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 355
The system has overheated.
Try to reduce the
temperature by tuning the
audio system off and
allowing the player to cool
down.
High temperature
• Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 348 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
349
uuAudio Error MessagesuCD Player
*
Features
Error Message Cause Solution
There is a problem with the
player. Eject and re-insert the
disc. If this does not work, try
another disc. If this error
continues contact Honda
dealer.
Disc error
• Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 355
The system has overheated.
Try to reduce the
temperature by turning the
audio system off and
allowing the player to cool
down.
High temperature
• Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 349 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
350
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with color audio system
*2:Models with Display Audio
Error Message Solution
USB Error
*1
Problem reading connected device. See
Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible
devices. If device is compatible, try
reconnecting device.
If this error remains, contact Honda
dealer.
*2
Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is
compatible with the audio system.
Bad USB Device
*1
Problem reading connected device. See
Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible
devices. If device is compatible, try
reconnecting device.
If this error remains, contact Honda
dealer.
*2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.
Unsupported Ver
*1
Problem reading connected device. See
Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible
devices. If device is compatible, try
reconnecting device.
If this error remains, contact Honda
dealer.
*2
• Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported
iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
• Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 350 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
351
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
*1:Models with color audio system
*2:Models with Display Audio
Error Message Solution
Problem reading connected device. See
Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible
devices. If device is compatible, try
reconnecting device.
If this error remains, contact Honda
dealer.
*2
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
*1
The selected file cannot be played on this
system
*2
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This
error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
*1
The connected device does not contain any
files that can be played on this system. See
Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible file
types.
*2
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in
the USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 351 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
352
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Features
Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.
Error Message Solution
Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.
*1
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
**** is not responding.
Would you like to close
it?
*1
App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 451
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 352 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
353
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the screen, select Channel to 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to
subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering
wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Channel not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Update:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Check Tuner:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.
Check Antenna:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
■
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
•
US: SiriusXM® Radio at
www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or
1-866-635-2349
•
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at
www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•
In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•
In tunnels
•
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•
Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 353 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
354
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
*
Features
Recommended CDs
*
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
*
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■
CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 354 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
355
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
*
Features
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●
Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●
Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 355 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
356
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■
iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) released between 2005 and 2010
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) released between 2007 and 2010
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus
Model
iPod nano (7th generation) released 2012
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015
iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone
6s Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus
iPad Pro 9.7 inch/iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation)
iPad 2/iPad (3rd generation)/iPad (4th generation)
iPad Air/iPad Air 2
iPad mini/iPad mini 2/iPad mini 3/iPad mini 4
1iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 356 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
357
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■
USB Flash Drives
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 357 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
358
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
Honda App License Agreement
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.
■
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 358 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
359
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License.
You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 359 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
360
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 360 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
361
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation.
The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE.
Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites:
The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 361 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
362
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates.
The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE.
Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information.
You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 362 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
363
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition:
You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards.
Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 363 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
364
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage.
Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information.
Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based).
If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 364 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
365
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability.
HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 365 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
366
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS
For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 366 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
367
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 367 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
368
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 368 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
369
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 369 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
370
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
Models with Display Audio
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
■
OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 370 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
371
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 371 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
372
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select About.
5. Select Legal Information.
Project/Component Name: BT module/eCos
Homepage URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/
License: GPL-2.0
License Link: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html
License Text: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/
Notices: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/
Location of Corresponding Source: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/
Models with Display Audio
Models with color audio system
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 372 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
373
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Continued
Features
License Information
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
■
DOLBY DIGITAL
■
DTS
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 373 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
374
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Features
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by DENSO CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.
■
Bluetooth
■
Windows Media
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 374 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
375
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Continued
Features
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch
are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad Air,
iPad mini, iPad Pro, Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App
Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
■
Apple
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 375 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
376
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Features
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent
portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does
not receive remuneration to
(i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/
VC-1 Video”) and/or
(ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal
activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1
Video.
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
■
MPEG
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 376 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
377
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Features
AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
■
SDHC Memory Card
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 377 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
378
Features
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
Rear seat passengers can enjoy a completely separate entertainment source than
front passengers, including movies, games, and other audio choices.
1Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
Blu-ray Disc
TM
, Blu-ray
TM
, and the logos are
trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
BD-XL, BD-Live, Blu-ray 3D, and Ultra HD Blu-ray are
not supported.
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure The
Rear Entertainment System remote complies with
FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines.
The Rear Entertainment System remote should be
kept at least 7.9 inch (20 cm) or more away from a
person’s body when operated.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 378 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
379
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uWireless Headphones
Features
Wireless Headphones
The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the Blu-ray/DVD rear
entertainment system by a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.
To turn on the switch: Press the (power)
button at the right earpiece. The indicator
comes on.
To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the
right earpiece.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS Headphone:X is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
1Wireless Headphones
Your vehicle comes with two wireless headphones.
Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece
marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to
your right ear.
Wearing the headphone backward may affect the
audio reception.
You can put the headphones into the front seat-back
upper pockets, and the remote into the front
passenger’s seat-back lower pocket as shown below.
Remote
Headphone
Indicator
(Power) Button
Volume
■
DTS Headphone:X
TM
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 379 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
380
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uAuxiliary Console Panels
Features
Auxiliary Console Panels
Headphone connectors for the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system are on the
back of the center console compartment.
■ Headphone Connectors
A headphone can also be used by connecting
to the auxiliary console panel. There are two
headphone connectors for the rear
passengers. Each connector has its own
volume control.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 380 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
381
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uHDMI
TM
Port
Features
HDMI
TM
Port
There is an HDMI
TM
port on the back of the center console compartment. The Blu-
ray/DVD rear entertainment system will accept HDMI
TM
port from video games and
video equipment which are equipped with an HDMI
TM
port.
Open the cover and insert the cable.
Overhead Screen
Pull down the screen to the first or second
detent until it latches.
1HDMI
TM
Port
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
The HDMI
TM
port is for use with the Blu-ray/DVD rear
entertainment system only.
Overhead
Screen
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 381 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
382
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uOperating the System
Features
Operating the System
To operate the system, set the power mode to ON or ACCESSORY. Select Rear
Entertainment, then Rear in the audio/information screen to turn on the
system. You can also turn on the system by pressing the (power) button on the
remote.
To display the home screen on the overhead screen, press the (home) button on
the remote. From this screen, you can use various apps or settings.
Rear Icon
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
To change the order of icons, press and hold the
ENTER button on the remote.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 382 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
383
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uVideo Accessibility
Continued
Features
Video Accessibility
The Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System (RES) supports an accessibility function
which allows the user to enable audio feedback of on-screen operations through the
wireless and wired headphones.
1. Press the (power) button on the RES
remote.
2. Select Accessibility, then press the ENTER
button on the remote.
The following selections are available:
•
Enable Accessibility
: Turns the accessibility mode on or off. (Factory default: Off)
• Speed of Audio Output: Adjusts to increase or decrease the speed of audio
output. (Factory default: Middle (8th) tick mark)
• Enable 3 Key Push: Enables or disables the feature that allows you to turn a
function on or off, or change a function setting without going through the menu.
(Factory default: On)
■
Selecting the Accessibility Function
1Selecting the Accessibility Function
Since the accessibility function is set to OFF by
default, you must set it to ON before using it.
You can also select Accessibility from the Settings
screen.
2 System Settings P. 389
To change the position of the Video Accessibility
icon, press and hold the ENTER button on the RES
remote, then drag the icon to the desired location.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 383 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
384
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uVideo Accessibility
Features
Press any of the following colored buttons on the RES remote three times to turn a
function on or off, or to change a function setting.
Red button: Accessibility
Green button: Subtitles
Yellow button: Secondary Audio
Blue button: Audio Format Switching
■
Changing Function Status
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 384 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
385
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
Continued
Features
Playing a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
To play a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
, insert a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
into the lower slot of the front
audio system, and select Rear in the audio/information screen.
u The system automatically starts the DVD or Blu-ray
TM
. DVD or Blu-ray
TM
is
available for the rear seat passenger only.
■
System Controls
(Power) Button
Press to turn the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system
on or off.
(Home) Button
Press to display the home screen.
(Light) Button
Press to illuminate the buttons for a few seconds.
/ Buttons
Press to change chapters.
(Play/Pause) Button
Press to pause or play a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
.
(Stop) Button
Press to stop a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Red/Green/Yellow/Blue Button
Press to use on a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
menu.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display or operation.
, , , and ENTER Buttons
Use , , , or to highlight a menu item, and
press the ENTER button to make a selection.
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 385 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
386
Features
1. Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
2. Select an item and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
The following items are available:
• DVD Menu/Blu-ray Menu: Displays the top menu of the DVD or Blu-ray
TM
.
• Aspect Ratio: Selects an aspect ratio of the image.
2 Setting the Aspect Ratio P. 386
• Brightness: Adjusts the screen’s brightness.
• Contrast: Adjusts the screen’s contrast.
• Root Menu
*1
: Displays the disc menu for the current playing title.
• Pop-up Menu
*2
: Displays the menu of the Blu-ray
TM
.
• Player Options: Displays while a DVD or Blu-ray
TM
is playing and changes the
DVD or Blu-ray
TM
preferences.
2 Setting the Player Options P. 387
■ Setting the Aspect Ratio
1. Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
2. Select Aspect Ratio.
3. Select the setting you want.
u You can select the three options; normal, full, or zoom.
*1: Appears only when you select the DVD source.
*2: Appears only when you select the Blu-ray
TM
source.
■
Rear DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Menu
1Rear DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Menu
During DVD or Blu-ray
TM
operation, when the source
is changed or the audio system is turned off, DVD or
Blu-ray
TM
operation stops.
Depending on the disc you insert, some items may
not be displayed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 386 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
387
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
Continued
Features
■ Setting the Player Options
1. Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
2. Select Player Options.
3. Select an item and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
The following items are available:
• Repeat:
Off: Repeat mode is off.
Title (only for DVD-V, AVCREC and BDAV): Repeats the current title.
Chapter (only for DVD-V, AVCREC and BDAV): Repeats the current chapter.
Program (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current program if the disc has the
correspondence list.
Playlist (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current playlist if the disc has the
correspondence list.
Entry Point (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current entry point if the disc has the
correspondence list.
• Subtitles and Audio: Selects the language of the DVD subtitle and audio.
• Angle: Selects the angle of the scene shot with multiple cameras.
• Search: Skips to a title or chapter.
2 Searching a title/chapter/program/playlist P. 388
• Change Order (only for DVD-VR, AVCREC and BDAV): Changes the order of
the program or playlist.
• Default Language: Selects the language for the menus, audio, and subtitle of
the DVD or Blu-ray
TM
.
• Sound Leveling: Adjusts the range of the loud and soft sound. Select Auto, On
or Off.
• Secondary Audio (only for BDMV): Turns on and off the function that plays the
available commentary or narrator audio along with the main disc track.
• Onscreen Remote: Displays the on-screen buttons for the remote.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 387 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
388
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
Features
■ Searching a title/chapter/program/playlist
1. Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
2. Select Player Options.
3. Select Search.
4. Enter a number of a title, chapter, program or playlist to skip, and then select
enter.
The following items are available:
• Title: Skips to a title you specify.
• Chapter: Skips to a chapter you specify.
• Program (only for DVD-VR): Skips to a program you specify while playing with
the program list.
• Playlist (only for DVD-VR): Skips to a playlist you specify while playing with the
playlist.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 388 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
389
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
Continued
Features
1. Press the (home) button on the remote.
2. Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the
Settings screen.
3. Select an item.
The following items are available:
• Display: Adjusts the screen’s preferences.
2 Adjusting the screen P. 390
• Language: Sets the system language used on all screens.
2 Setting the Language P. 390
• Headphones: Sets the surround of the wireless headphones.
2 Setting the Headphones P. 390
• Accessibility: With On selected, the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system
provides audio feedback through the headphones to assist the user with on-
screen operations.
• About My System: Displays the information of the Blu-ray/DVD rear
entertainment system.
• System Reset: Resets the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system settings and
erases all login information.
After you make all the adjustments, press the (back) or (home) button to
return.
■
System Settings
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 389 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
390
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
Features
■ Adjusting the screen
1. Press the (home) button on the remote.
2. Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the
Settings screen.
3. Select Display and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
4. Select the setting you want.
The following items are available:
• Brightness: Adjusts the screen’s brightness.
• Contrast: Adjusts the screen’s contrast.
• Tint: Adjusts the screen’s hue.
• Color: Adjusts the screen’s color strength.
■ Setting the Language
1. Press the (home) button on the remote.
2. Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the
Settings screen.
3. Select Language and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
4. Select the setting you want.
u You can select the language from US English, UK English, Spanish,
Canadian French, Arabic, or Korean.
■ Setting the Headphones
1. Press the (home) button on the remote.
2. Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the
Settings screen.
3. Select Headphones and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
4. Select the setting you want.
u You can select the options from Off or On. Select Off to disable the feature.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 390 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
391
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uFront Control Panel Operation
Continued
Features
Front Control Panel Operation
You can operate the Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System (RES) from the audio/
information screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Rear Entertainment.
3. Select Rear if the power is off.
u If you select this icon while the system is
operating, the system is turned off.
4. Select Rear Apps.
5. Select the app you want to use.
The following items are available on the audio/information screen:
• Rear: Turns the system on or off.
• Now Playing: Displays the current playing app.
• Rear Apps: Displays the home screen.
• CabinTalk: Displays the CabinTalk screen.
2 CabinTalk
TM*
P. 506
• Remote: Disables controls from the remote.
• Settings: Changes the system settings.
2 Rear System Setup P. 392
■
Selecting the App using Front Control Panel
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 391 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
392
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uFront Control Panel Operation
Features
■ Manage Apps
Shows or hides app icons on the home screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Rear Entertainment.
3. Select Rear Apps.
4. Select Settings.
5. Select Manage Apps.
6. Select Available or Hidden.
7. Select Save.
■
Rear System Setup
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 392 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
394
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying Apps
Features
Playing Apps
You can play apps such as USB, iPod, HDMI® and more from the rear seats.
1Playing Apps
Streaming Applications
Your vehicle’s Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system
comes pre-loaded with audio and video streaming
applications.
Before launching any application, first confirm that
your vehicle’s date and time are set correctly. Having
the incorrect date and time settings may prevent your
applications from operating correctly.
You can set the date and time on the front display in
the following steps.
Select HomeSettingsDate & TimeSet Date &
Time
Your vehicle is equipped with the ability to apply
software updates. When a software update is
provided to your vehicle, please accept the update
and allow the installation to complete.
Disclaimer:
The video and audio quality of your streaming
applications will depend on your internet connection.
If you experience lagging or disconnections, check
your connection and confirm it is operational.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 394 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
395
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying Apps
Continued
Features
■
System Controls
(Power) Button
Press to turn the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system
on or off.
(Home) Button
Press to display the home screen.
(Light) Button
Press to illuminate the buttons for a few seconds.
/ Buttons
Press to change videos or audio files.
(Play/Pause) Button
Press to pause or play a video or audio file.
(Stop) Button
Press to stop a video or audio file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display or operation.
, , , and ENTER Buttons
Use , , , or to highlight a menu item, and
press the ENTER button to make a selection.
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 395 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
397
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying Apps
Continued
Features
To play videos from an HDMI
TM
-compatible device, connect the device using an
HDMI
TM
cable.
2 HDMI
TM
Port P. 381
Press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the HDMI icon on the
overhead screen.
When you press the MENU button on the remote while the video using the HDMI
TM
is playing, the audio menu appears on the overhead screen.
The available options appear on the overhead screen are aspect ratio, brightness,
and contrast.
■
Playing a Video Using the HDMI
TM
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 397 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlaying Apps
398
Features
Displays the current location temperature, time remaining, distance traveled, and
distance remaining with an animation.
To play the app, press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the
How Much Farther? icon on the overhead screen.
You can select a background from five types using or on the remote, and bring
some items (at top of the screen) up and down using or .
Plays a stored video or audio file from a connected device via Wi-Fi.
Connect the device using Wi-Fi.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 338
Press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the Media Servers icon
on the overhead screen.
The operation are the same as the USB mode.
■
How Much Farther?
TM
*
■
Media Servers
1How Much Farther?
TM
*
When there is no destination set on the navigation
system, an animated demonstration will be displayed.
3
4
1Media Servers
NOTE: For this feature to work, an app that exposes
your device as a media server must be installed on
your device. Open this app on your device prior to
selecting the Media Servers icon. This feature is only
supported on Android phones.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 398 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
399
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uAudio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
Features
Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
The table shows the possible audio source combinations of the front audio system
and Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system’s simultaneous use.
*1:The front seat passengers are only able to hear the DVD’s, Blu-ray
TM
’s or
HDMI
TM
’s sound from the front speakers.
Front
AM/FM
Radio
SiriusXM®
Radio
CD
DVD
*1
Blu-ray
TM*1
USB
iPod
Rear
CD
DVD
*1
Blu-ray
TM*1
Yes Yes Yes Yes
USB
iPod
Yes Yes No Yes
HDMI
TM*1
Yes Yes No Yes
1Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
Yes: These audio sources are simultaneously playable.
When listening to the same source in both the front
and rear, the playing channel or track will also be the
same for each.
No: These audio sources are not simultaneously
playable.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 399 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
401
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
■ Java
Oracle, Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
BEFORE USING THIS IN-CAR BLU-RAY PRODUCT, PLEASE READ ALL OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END USER
LICESE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) CAREFULLY. THIS AGREEMENT IS A LEGALLY BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN END USER (“you”) AND
PANASONIC THAT SETS FORTH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THAT GOVERN YOUR USE OF ORACLE JAVA ME MEDIA PACK FOR CDC
(the “program”) IMPLEMENTED IN THIS IN-CAR BLU-RAY PRODUCT.
(1) Java Technology Restrictions. You are prohibited from creating, modifying, changing the behavior of classes, interfaces, or subpackages
that are in any way identified as “Java”, “Javax”, “Sun” or similar convention as specified by Oracle in any naming convention designation.
(2) Trademarks and Logos. You shall acknowledge that Oracle owns the Java trademark and all Java-related trademarks, logos and icons
including the Coffee Cup and Duke (“Java Marks”) and shall agree to: (a) comply with the Java Trademark Guidelines at
http://www.oracle.com/us/legal/third-party-trademarks/index.html; (b) not do anything harmful to or inconsistent with Oracle's rights in
the Java Marks; and (c) assist Oracle in protecting those rights, including assigning to Oracle any rights acquired by you in any Java Mark.
(3) Third Party Code. You shall read additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to portions of the programs are set forth
below.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 401 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
402
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
COMPONENTS
The following software (or certain identified files distributed with the software) may be included in this product. Unless otherwise specified,
the software identified in this file is licensed under the licenses described below. The disclaimers and copyright notices provided are based
on information made available to Oracle by the third party licensors listed.
3DES
3DES
Des3Cipher - the triple-DES encryption method
Copyright (C) 1996 by Jef Poskanzer <j[email protected]>. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Visit the ACME Labs Java page for up-to-date versions of this and other fine Java utilities: http:www.acme.com/java/
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 402 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
403
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
AES
Cryptix General License
Copyright (c) 1995-2005 The Cryptix Foundation Limited.All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 403 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
404
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
DES
DES
DesCipher - the DES encryption method
@@ The meat of this code is by Dave Zimmerman <[email protected]>, and is:
Copyright (c) 1996 Widget Workshop, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for NON-COMMERCIAL or COMMERCIAL purposes
and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright notice is kept intact.
WIDGET WORKSHOP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. WIDGET WORKSHOP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING,
MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS DERIVATIVES.
THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE AS ON-LINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE
OF THE SOFTWARE COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH
RISK ACTIVITIES”). WIDGET WORKSHOP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES.
@@ The rest of the code is:
Copyright (C) 1996 by Jef Poskanzer <j[email protected]>. All rights reserved.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 404 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
405
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Visit the ACME Labs Java page for up-to-date versions of this and other fine Java utilities: http:www.acme.com/java/
JPEG library
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy,
merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its
quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 405 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
406
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
zlib 1.1.3
@@ Acknowledgments:
Oracle gratefully acknowledges the contributions of Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler in creating the zlib general purpose compression
library which is used in this product.
@@ Copyright notice:
(C) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for
free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-
party code.
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 406 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
407
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your
changes.
(4) Others.
(i)You shall not install the programs separately and independently from this Blu-ray product.
(ii)You agree not to reply on the future availability of any programs or services which Oracle will provide.
(5) ENTIRE AGREEMENT
You agree that this Agreement is the complete agreement pertaining to the subject matter hereof (including references to information
contained in a URL) and this Agreement supersedes all prior or contemporaneous written or oral agreements or representations existing
between you and Panasonic with respect to such subject matter. If any term of this Agreement is found to be invalid or unenforceable, the
remaining provisions will remain effective. Panasonic’s failure to enforce any right or provisions in this Agreement will not constitute a
waiver of such provision, or any other provision of this Agreement.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 407 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
408
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
■ HDMI
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
■ Cinavia
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film and videos and their
soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To
request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such
technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2014 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 408 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
409
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
■ MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or
other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to
(i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or
(ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider
licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video.
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 409 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
410
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
■ OSS
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) The software developed by, or developed for, Panasonic Corporation (“Panasonic”),
(2) The software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
(3) The software licensed under the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2 (“GPL”),
(4) The software licensed under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2.1 (“LGPL”), and/or
(5) Open sourced software licensed under terms and conditions other than GPL or LGPL.
For the software classified as (3) or (4) above, please refer to the terms and conditions of GPL and LGPL at the websites listed below:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
The software classified as (3) and (4) above are copyrighted by multiple people. Please refer to the websites below regarding the copyright
notices of those people.
http://www.hondaopensource2.com/17M_BDP/
At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will give to any third party who contacts us at the Contact Information
provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy
of the source code corresponding to the GPL/LGPL Software.
Please note that we are unable to answer any queries regarding source code details, etc.
[Contact Information]
Engineering Administration Group Manager Panasonic Corporation, Automotive Systems Company, 4261 Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku,
Yokohama, Kanagawa 224-8520, Japan
Furthermore, source code corresponding to the GPL/LGPL Software listed above is freely available to you and any member of the public at
the websites listed below:
http://www.hondaopensource2.com/17M_BDP/
The software classified as (5) above contains various open sourced software (“OSS”) including the following software:
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 410 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
411
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
OpenSSL
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the
toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related
to OpenSSL please contact [email protected].
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 411 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
412
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 412 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
413
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot
simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.]
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 413 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
414
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
portmap
Copyright (c) 1998, Regents of the University of California All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the University of California, Berkeley nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 414 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
415
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
tcp_wrappers
Copyright (c) 1998, Regents of the University of California All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the University of California, Berkeley nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 415 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
416
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
FreeType
Portions of this software are copyright (c) 1996-2002, 2006 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Legal Terms
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms 'package', 'FreeType Project', and 'FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the
authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the 'FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
'You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where 'using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as
well as linking it to form a 'program' or 'executable'. This program is referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributedin the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular
file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below.
1. No Warranty
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 416 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
417
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
2. Redistribution
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy,
create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works
thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions:
• Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all
copies of source files.
• Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team,
in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this
isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work,
you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.
3. Advertising
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or
advertising materials: 'FreeType Project', 'FreeType Engine', 'FreeType library', or 'FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this
license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the rightto use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing,
ormodifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 417 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
418
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
4. Contacts
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
• [email protected] Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted dditions to the library and
distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
• [email protected]rg Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
libjpeg
this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group
Vera.ttf
Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this license (“Fonts”) and
associated documentation files (the “Font Software”), to reproduce and distribute the Font Software, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Font Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of one or more of the Font Software
typefaces.
The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified
and additional glyphs or characters may be added to the Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not containing either the words
“Bitstream” or the word “Vera”.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 418 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
419
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the
“Bitstream Vera” names.
The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but no copy of one or more of the Font Software typefaces may be
sold by itself.
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT,
TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome Foundation
or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, contact: fonts at gnome dot org.
libtiff
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
providedbthat (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation,
and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the
specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 419 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
420
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM
LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR
ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
giflib
The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright (c) 1997 Eric S. Raymond
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 420 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
421
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Continued
Features
zlib
zlib License
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would beappreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
■ FDA
-Caution-
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 421 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
422
Features
This unit is compatible with NTSC and PAL color TV systems. Use discs that are
labeled as NTSC or PAL. Capability of this unit to play discs other than NTSC or PAL
TV system (SECAM) is not guaranteed.
Some DVD/Blu-ray
TM
discs have a region code such as , , and this number
shows the region the disc can be played in. Playable disc regions are restricted
depending on the map coverage areas. If you play other discs, Check Disc message
is displayed. In addition, some discs that do not have a region code number may still
have a region restriction and may not be played on this unit.
■
Playable Disc Types
Type and symbol
of playable disc
Size/Playable Side Max. play time
<MPEG 2 standard>
12 cm/single-sided Single layer
Dual layer
133 min.
242 min.
266 min.
484 min.
12 cm/Double-sided Single layer
Dual layer
12 cm/signal-side Single layer
Dual layer
at 27 Mbps 123 min.
246 min.
■
Playable Disc Region Codes
1Playable Disc Types
Some discs may not function as expected. Also read
the instruction book which comes with the disc.
Disc Symbols
The following symbols appear on DVD/Blu-ray
TM
discs
or packing.
For Dual Disc (double sided disc with
both a DVD layer and a non-DVD
layer), the DVD layer can be played as a
Video DVD if the disc has the mark
displayed on the right. Discs without the mark and
the non-DVD layer are not supported, and operation
cannot be guaranteed. In addition, the discs may be
scratched when they are inserted or ejected.
Symbol Description
Number of available soundtracks
Number of available subtitles
Number of angles
Selectable screen aspect ratios
(TV screen’s horizontal to vertical ratio)
16:9: Widescreen
4:3: Normal screen
Selectable region codes
ALL: Region free
A number (ex. 1): Particular region code
Selectable region codes
ABC: Region free
An alphabet (ex. A): Particular region code
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 422 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
423
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uPlayable Discs
Features
Compression video not supported, Compression audio specification are following.
■
Recommended Discs
Media
CD-R/CD-RW
DVD-R/DVD-RW
DVD+R/DVD+RW
Disc format
CD-ROM Mode1
CD-ROM Mode2 Form1
DVD-ROM
File format
ISO9660 Level 1 & 2
Romeo, Joliet
Audio format
MP3 WMA AAC
Audio format
specification
MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
MPEG-2.5 AUDIO LAYER3
Microsoft Windows Media
Audio Ver7,8,9
MPEG4-AAC
m4a files created by iTunes
(Apple)
Sampling
frequency
[kHz]
MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
MPEG-2.5: 8/11.025/12
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/
32/44.1/48
Exceptions not supported by
DVD Player:12/24
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/
32/44.1/48
Bit rate [kbps]
MPEG1: 32/40/48/56/64/
80/96/112/128/160/192/
224/256/320
MPEG2: 8/16/24/32/40/48/
56/64/80/96/112/128/144/
160
MPEG2.5: 8/16/24/32/40/
48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
144/160
5/8/16/24/32/40/48/64/80/
96/128/160/192/224/256/
320/384
Exceptions not supported by
DVD Player: 24/224/384
8/16/20/24/28/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160/192/
224/256/320/384/448/512/
576
Exceptions not supported by
DVD Player: 384/448/512/
576
File extension
.mp3/.MP3 .wma/.WMA .m4a/.M4A
1Recommended Discs
Large files may take longer to change audio or fast-
forward/fast-rewind.
Some CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW may not be read
due to the discs’ encoding properties. Use discs
recorded with disc-at-once or track-at-once for this
unit.
“AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive”
logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 423 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
424
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uDVD or Blu-ray
TM
Player Error Messages
Features
DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Player Error Messages
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message in Audio/
Information Screen
Error Message in Overhead
Screen
Cause Solution
Problem ejecting disc from the
player. Contact Honda dealer to
fix this problem.
Problem ejecting disc from the
player.
Contact Honda dealer to fix this
problem.
Disc stuck in player
• Contact a dealer and the
player needs to be replaced.
There is a problem with the
player. Eject and re-insert the
disc. If this does not work, try
another disc. If the error
continues, contact Honda
dealer.
There seems to be a problems
playing this disc. Try inserting
the disc into the Blu-ray player
again.
Focus error
Unsupported disc error
Mechanical error
Servo error
DRM file access
Error file access
Device error
• Press the button and
remove the disc, and check
that the error message is
cleared.
• Check that the disc is not
damaged or deformed, and
insert the disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 355
The system has overheated. Try
to reduce the temperature by
tuning the audio system off
and allowing the player to cool
down.
The Blu-ray player is too hot
right now.
Give it some time to cool off
and try again later.
High temperature
• Turn the audio system off and
allow the player to cool down
until the error message is
cleared.
Playback stopped. The content
being played is protected by
Cinavia and is not authorized
for playback on this device.
Playback stopped. The content
being played is protected by
Cinavia
TM
and is not authorized
for playback on this device.
For more information, see
http://www.cinavia.com.
Message Code 1.
Cinavia 1 error
• Current track/file will be
skipped. The next supported
track/file plays automatically.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 424 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
425
uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System
*
uDVD or Blu-ray
TM
Player Error Messages
Features
Error Message in Audio/
Information Screen
Error Message in Overhead
Screen
Cause Solution
Audio outputs temporarily
muted. Do not adjust the
playback volume. The content
being played is protected by
Cinavia and is not authorized
for playback on this device. For
more information, see http://
www.cinavia.com. Message
Code 3.
Audio outputs temporarily
muted. Do not adjust the
playback volume. The content
being played is protected by
Cinavia
TM
and is not authorized
for playback on this device. For
more information, see http://
www.cinavia.com. Message
Code 3.
Cinavia 3 error
• Current track/file will be
skipped. The next supported
track/file plays automatically.
This disc cannot be played.
Check that the disc is not
damaged or deformed. If the
disc is OK, see Owner’s Manual
for information on supported
disc types and files.
There seems to be a problem
with this disc.
Please check if it might be
damaged.
Region mismatch
• Press the button and
remove the disc, and check
that the error message is
cleared.
• Check the disk if region code is
matched.
—
Cannot access Blu-ray Player.
Contact Honda dealer.
DTCP certificate error
• Contact a dealer and the
player needs to be replaced.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 425 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
426
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the button, then select Phone Setup.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to
(P.
Models with color audio system
1How to customize
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio/Information Screen
MENU/CLOCK Button
Selector Knob
(Phone) Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 426 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
427
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Adjust Clock
Settings
Bluetooth Setup Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device
Display Adjustment Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Rear Camera Camera Guideline
RDS Settings RDS Information
Radio Text
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 427 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
428
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Display Change Audio
Wallpaper
Wallpaper Select
Import
Delete
Color Theme Blue
Red
Amber
Gray
Language
Clock Format 12h
24h
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 428 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
429
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Ringtone Fixed
Mobile Phone
Bluetooth Setup Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Speed Dial
Caller ID Info Name Priority
Number Priority
System Clear
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 429 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
430
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Adjust Clock
Adjusts clock.
2 Clock P. 136
—
Settings
RDS
Settings
RDS Information
Selects whether the RDS information comes
on.
On
*1
/Off
Radio Text
Displays the radio text information of the
selected RDS station.
—
Bluetooth
Setup
Add New Device
See
Bluetooth Setup
on P. 432
Connect an Audio
Device
Display
Adjustment
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
—
Rear
Camera
Camera Guideline
Selects whether the guidelines come on the
audio/information screen.
On
*1
/Off
Brightness
See
Display Adjustment
on P. 430Contrast
Black Level
Color
Changes the color of the audio/information
screen.
—
Tint
Changes the tint of the audio/information
screen.
—
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 430 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
431
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Display Change Changes the display type. Audio
*1
/Wallpaper
Wallpaper
Select Changes the wallpaper type.
Clock
*1
/Image1/Image2/
Image3
Import
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 254
—
Delete Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Image1
*1
/Image2/Image3
Color Theme
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Blue
*1
/Red/Amber/Gray
Language Changes the display language. English
*1
/French/Spanish
Clock Format
Selects the digital clock display from 12h to
24h.
12h
*1
/24h
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 431 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
432
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Setup
Bluetooth
Setup
Add New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 461
—
Connect a Phone
Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 461
—
Connect an Audio
Device
Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. —
Disconnect All Devices Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Pass-Key Changes a pairing code. —
Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 470
—
Ringtone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone
*1
Caller ID Info
Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number
as the caller ID.
Name Priority
*1
/Number
Priority
System Clear
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Phone Setup group as default.
—
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 432 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
433
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to
(P.
Models with Display Audio
Audio/Information
Screen
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 433 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
434
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ Customization flow
Select Settings.
Automatic Date &
Time
Set Date
Set Time
System
Select .
Automatic Time
Zone
*
Select Time Format
HondaLink Subscription Status
Set Time Zone
Set Date & Time
Touch
Sensitivity
Subscriptions
Language
Factory Data
Reset
About
Date & Time
Select time zone
System SoundsSystem Volumes
Navigation Guidance
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 434 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
435
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Advanced
Options
Interruption Mode
Events and
reminders
Calls
App Manager
Recent Location
Request from Apps
Location Setting
Interruptions
Messages
Calls/messages
from
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 435 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
436
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Connections
+ Connect New Device
Saved Devices
Change Mode
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Connected Devices
CabinControl
Connection
Information
(Device list)
CabinControl Options
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 436 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
437
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Vehicle
Driving Position
Setup
*
Seat Position Movement at Entry/Exit
Memory Position Link
Meter Setup Adjust Outside Temp Display
Trip A Reset Timing
Trip B Reset Timing
Reverse Shift Position Beep
*
Auto Idle Stop Display
*
Adjust Alarm Volume
Turn by Turn Display
Power Tailgate
Setup
*
Power Tailgate Keyless Open Mode
Power Tailgate Open by Outer Handle
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off
Walk Away Auto Lock
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Hands Free Access Power Tailgate
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 437 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
438
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Door Setup Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance
Information
Driver Assist
System Setup
Oil Life
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Blind Spot Information
*
Wireless
Charger
*
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Auto Light Sensitivity
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 438 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
439
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Audio Zones
*
Bass / Treble
Camera
Show with Turn SignalLaneWatch
*
Show Reference Line
Rear Camera Default Camera View
Guidelines
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Sound
Balance / Fader
Center /
Subwoofer
Volume
*
DTS Neural
Surround
*
Speed Volume
Compensation
Notifications
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Display
Subwoofer
Volume
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 439 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
440
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Date & Time
Set
Date &
Time
Automatic
Date &
Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Set Date
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 136
—
Set Time
Adjusts clock.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 136
—
Set
Time
Zone
Automatic
Time Zone
*
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock when driving through different time
zones.
ON
*1
/OFF
Select time
zone
Changes the time zone manually. —
Select Time Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 440 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
441
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
System
Volumes
System Sounds Changes the system sounds volume. —
Navigation
Guidance
*
Changes the navigation guidance volume. —
Touch
Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low
*1
Subscriptions
HondaLink
Subscription Status
Lists subscriptions and subscription status for
HondaLink®.
—
Language Changes the display language.
English (United
States)
*1
/English
(United Kingdom)/
Korean/French/
Spanish/Arabic
Factory Data
Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 451
Continue/Cancel
About Displays the Android setting items. —
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 441 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
442
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Advanced
Options
App Manager
Displays the Android system memory and apps
information.
—
Recent Location
Request from Apps
Displays the recent location requests from apps. —
Location Setting
Selects OFF not to allow apps including the
navigation system
*
to access the vehicle’s location.
ON
*1
/OFF
Inter-
ruptions
Inter-
ruption
Mode
Sets the interruption mode for allowing to notify
when calls and notifications arrive.
Always interrupt
*1
/
Don’t interrupt/
Allow only priority
interruptions
Events and
reminders
Sets priority interruptions of events and reminders. ON
*1
/OFF
Calls Sets priority interruptions of calls. ON
*1
/OFF
Messages
Sets priority interruptions of messages. ON
*1
/OFF
Calls/
messages
from
Sets priority interruptions of from who.
Anyone
*1
/Contacts
only/Starred
contacts only
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 442 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
443
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Connec-
tions
Bluetooth
+ Connect New
Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
—
Saved Devices
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
—
Wi-Fi
Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode.
Network
*1
/HotSpot/
OFF
Available Networks/
Connected Devices
Displays the available network(s) or current
connected device(s).
—
Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection. —
Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. —
CabinControl
Options
Cabin-
Control
Turns the Honda CabinControl function on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Connection
Information
Displays the Honda CabinControl connection
information.
—
(Device list) Selects functions or deletes a device. —
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 443 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
444
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Seat Position
Movement at Entry/
Exit
Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out
of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.
ON
*1
/OFF
Memory Position
Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and
off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
Trip B Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
Reverse Shift
Position Beep
*
Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON/OFF
*1
Auto Idle Stop
Display
*
Selects whether the Auto Idle Stop display comes
on or not.
ON/OFF
*1
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 444 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
445
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Meter Setup
Turn by Turn Display
Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance.
ON
*1
/OFF
Fuel Efficiency
Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Power
Tailgate
Setup
*
Power Tailgate
Keyless Open Mode
Changes the keyless setting for when the power
tailgate opens.
Anytime
*1
/When
Unlocked
Power Tailgate Open
by Outer Handle
Changes the setting to open power tailgate by
tailgate outer handle.
Off (Manual only)/
On (Power/
Manual)
*1
Hands Free Access
Power Tailgate
*
Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a
swift forward in and out kicking motion under the
rear bumper.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door or
Tailgate
*1
/All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 445 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
446
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Keyless Access
Setup
Remote Start System
On/Off
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Walk Away Auto
Lock
Changes the settings for the automatic locking the
doors when you walk away from the vehicle while
carrying the remote.
Enable/Disable
*1
Driver Assist
System Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance CMBS
TM
alerts.
Long/Normal
*1
/
Short
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC range.
ON/OFF
*1
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
ON/OFF
*1
Blind Spot
Information
*
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible and Visual
Alert
*1
/Visual Alert/
OFF
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 446 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
447
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Door Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
With Vehicle
Speed
*1
/Shift from
P/OFF
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
All Doors with
Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors
with Shift to P/All
Doors with IGN Off/
OFF
Key and Remote
Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in
key.
Driver Door
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON
*1
/OFF
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90 sec/60 sec/30
sec
*1
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 447 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
448
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60 sec/30 sec
*1
/15
sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60 sec/30 sec/15
sec
*1
/0 sec
Auto Interior
Illumination
Sensitivity
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position.
Min/Low/Mid
*1
/
High/Max
Auto Headlight On
with Wiper On
Changes the settings for the wiper operation when
the headlights automatically come on while the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position.
ON
*1
/OFF
Auto Light
Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/
Low/Min
Wireless
Charger
*
Turns the wireless charger feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Maintenance
Information
Oil Life
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 448 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
449
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Camera
Default Camera View
Changes the camera view mode when the rear
camera monitor is turned on.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 625
Last Used/Normal
View/Wide View
*1
Guidelines
Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 625
Dynamic/Fixed/
Both
*1
/OFF
Cross Traffic
Monitor
*
Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
LaneWatch
*
Show with Turn
Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a
right turn.
ON
*1
/OFF
Show Reference Line
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
ON
*1
/OFF
Display
Brightness
Adjusts the settings of the audio/information
screen.
2 Display Setup P. 297
Contrast
Black Level
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 449 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
450
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Sound
Bass / Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 296
Center /
Subwoofer
Volume
*
Subwoofer
Volume
*
Balance / Fader
Audio Zones
*
Speed Volume
Compensation
DTS Neural
Surround
*
Notifications Changes the notification settings for apps. —
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 450 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
451
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings.
6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 333
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 451 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
452
Features
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.
■
Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 452 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
453
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
Continued
Features
Training HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
learned code:
• Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the
orange indicator blinks. Release the
buttons, and proceed to step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
III HomeLink
Button
Indicator
I HomeLink
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 453 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
454
Features
■
Programming a Button
1Training HomeLink
Reprogramming a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
Erasing Button Memory
To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold
the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink
indicator changes from
orange to rapidly flashing green
.
This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all
programming before selling the vehicle.
Operating
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device.
Questions
For questions or comments, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline
(North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
2.
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash
orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
Release the HomeLink button and position the
remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches
(3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to
program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under
“programming a button.”
Training
Complete
HomeLink LED is
continuously on green.
YES
YES
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink® button you want to program.
3b.
Canadian Garage Door Opener
A. Press and release the HomeLink
button. Press, hold and release the
button on the remote every 2 secs.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
change from slowly flashing orange to
rapidly flashing or continuously on
green? The process should take less
than 60 seconds.
NO
2.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly
flashing orange?
NO
3a. Hold the button on the remote
transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator
(LED) change from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green or
continuously on green? The process
should take less than 60 seconds.
5.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes
green.
5a.
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
6. Press and hold the HomeLink button
again.
The remote-controlled device should
operate.
Training Complete
5b.
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2
secs.
4.
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink
button for about a second. Does the device
(garage door opener) work?
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 454 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
455
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■
HFL Buttons
1Using HFL
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities, visit
automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-
888-528 -7876.
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•
Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 470
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with color audio system
Microphone
(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Selector Knob
(Phone) Button
Volume up
Volume down
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 455 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
456
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 470
■
HFL Status Display
1Using HFL
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Roaming Status
Caller's Name
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 456 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
457
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
or
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Phone
Speed Dial
*1
Add New
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Dialed Calls
Received Calls
Missed Calls
Phonebook
*1
Dial
*1
Call History
*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 457 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
458
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Bluetooth SetupPhone Setup
Redial
*1
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Change a pairing code.
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Disconnect a paired device from the system.
Delete a previously paired device.
Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 458 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
459
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Call History
Phonebook
Phone Number
Speed Dial
*1
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag
Delete Voice Tag
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Add New
Existing entry list
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 459 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
460
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Fixed
Mobile Phone
System Clear
Ringtone
Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.
Name Priority
Number Priority
Caller ID Info Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.
Select the ring tone stored in HFL.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 460 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
461
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 461 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
462
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup,
then press .
4. Rotate to select Add New Device,
then press .
u The screen changes to device list.
5. Rotate to select Add New, then press
.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 462 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
463
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
6. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
7. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
8. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by a phone.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 463 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
464
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a desired device name,
then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 464 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
465
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press
.
5. Input a new pairing code, then press .
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 465 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
466
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then
press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 466 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
467
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Mobile Phone or
Fixed, then press .
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then
press .
4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model
of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone
will sound if the phone is connected.
■
Caller’s ID Information
1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is
stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 467 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
468
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
All speed dial entries, all imported phonebook data, all call history data, paired
phones, pairing codes, caller’s ID settings, and volume settings are reset as default.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.
■
To Clear the System
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 468 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
469
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Pager
Work
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 469 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
470
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 470 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
471
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To edit a speed dial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 471 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
472
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
■ To change a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Cha
Cha
Cha
Cha
Cha
nge
nge
nge
e
e
Sp
Sp
Sp
Sp
p
eed
eed
eed
ee
ee
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
al
al
al
al
al
Del
Del
Del
Del
Del
eteeteete
ete
ete
Sp
SpSp
Sp
p
eedeedeed
eed
ee
Di Di
Di
Di
alal
al
al
al
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 472 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
473
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 473 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
474
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 474 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
475
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 456
2 Speed Dial P. 470
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 456
2 Speed Dial P. 470
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 475 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
476
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a
phone is connected to the system.)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 476 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
477
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button and
call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 470
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the button and
follow the prompts.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 477 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
478
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the
call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and buttons.
Rotate to select the icon, then press .
HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 478 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
479
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 479 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
480
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities,
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be
ON.
2 Phone Setup P. 485
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
•
Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number.
Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, select the audio
system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
If there is no speed dial entry in the system, the pop-
up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 490
If there is no call history, the call history is disabled.
Models with Display Audio
(Talk) Button
Volume up
Microphone
(Hang-up) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Volume down
ENTER Button
(Back) Button
// / Buttons
3
4
(Home) Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 480 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
481
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen of the driver
information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.
/ / / buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen
of the driver information interface.
ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone
screen of the driver information interface.
(Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information
interface.
To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface:
1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel.
2. Select Phone.
u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 481 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
482
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 490
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 482 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
483
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■ Phone settings screen
1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Settings.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Change Connected Phone
(Existing entry list)
+ Connect New Device
Pair a new phone to the system.
Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Ringtone
Select the ring tone.
Auto Sync Phone
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.
HondaLink Assist
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 483 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
484
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Recent Calls
Favorite Contacts
All
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
Missed
Display the last missed calls.
Keypad
Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Contacts
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 484 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
485
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select Options.
6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.
■
Phone Setup
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 485 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
486
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Connect Phone.
4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select + Connect
New Device.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone still does not appear,
search for Bluetooth® devices using your
phone.
From your phone, search for HandsFree
Link.
6. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
7. Select desired functions and then select
Connect.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue or Connect
without Internet.
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or more icons on
the right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone can be used with the internet
tethering.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth
compatible devices is unavailable and + Connect
New Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth
screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 486 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
487
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select Change Connected Phone.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select , or .
5. Select Apply.
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select Change Connected Phone.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete Device.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device
from the Bluetooth screen.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 487 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
488
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select Ringtone.
3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the
speakers.
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
■
Automatic Transferring
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 488 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
489
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select Auto Sync Phone.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons
indicate what types of numbers are stored for that
name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile Work
Other
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 489 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
490
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or
Keypad screen.
3. Select the star icon.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the speed dial is successfully stored.
u To remove the speed dial, select the star
icon again.
■
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Contacts Screen
Keypad Screen
Star Icon
Star Icon
Star Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 490 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
491
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To edit a speed dial
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to delete.
4. Select Remove Contact.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 491 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
492
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 492 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
493
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last
Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 493 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
494
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed,
and Received.
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper
right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 484
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of speed dial
entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to the system.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 494 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
495
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call... screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the
call.
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and buttons.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Keypad: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.
Mute Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 495 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
496
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
notice
1. Select .
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Notifications.
5. Select ON or OFF.
■
To Set Up Text Message Options
1To Set Up Text Message Options
To use the text message function, it may be necessary
to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text message notice
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 496 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
497
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages
received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and
replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Select Open to display the message.
u The text message is displayed.
3. Select Play to listen to the message. To
discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■
Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent a
text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 of the last text messages received.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 497 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
498
Features
You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive
notifications.
1. Select .
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Change Connected Phone.
5. Change a desired phone.
2 To change the currently paired phone
P. 487
■
Selecting a Phone
1Selecting a Phone
You can only receive notifications from one phone at
a time.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 498 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
499
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
1. Select .
2. Select Messages.
u Select a phone if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The (blue) icon appears next to an unread
message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message
will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
message from the system, the message goes to your
phone’s outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select Prev
or Next on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 499 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
500
Features
■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Play.
u The system starts reading the message
aloud.
3. Select Pause to stop reading.
Select Play again to start reading the
message.
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent appears on the screen
when the reply message was successfully
sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•
I’m on my way.
•
I’m running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create
New Message.
2 To edit a reply message P. 501
Only certain phones receive and send messages when
paired and connected. For a list of compatible
phones:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 500 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
501
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To edit a reply message
1. Select .
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Edit System Replies.
5. Select the reply message you want to edit
or + Create New Message.
u The on-screen keyboard screen is
displayed.
6. Enter a reply message, and then select
Save.
■ To delete a reply message
1. Select .
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Delete System Replies.
5. Select on the reply message you want to
delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Select Delete.
1To edit a reply message
You can change the order of reply messages by
selecting Reorder.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 501 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
502
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 502 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
503
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink® operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator
*1
; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at
www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will
attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE
PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator.
■
In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when:
•
You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
•
There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 503 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
504
Features
■ To enable notification
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 483
2. Select HondaLink Assist.
3. Select ON or OFF.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
•
ON: Notification is available.
•
OFF: Disable the feature.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 504 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
505
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ Manual operator connection
*
If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator
in a situation where no airbag has deployed,
you can manually connect to them by pressing
the ASSIST button with the power mode in
ACCESSORY or ON.
1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console.
2. Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the HondaLink®
operator.
1Manual operator connection
*
Do not press the button while driving. When you
need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a
safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the
ASSIST button.
ASSIST Button
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 505 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
506
Features
CabinTalk
TM*
Your audio system allows you or the front passenger voices to be broadcast to the
second and third row seat’s passengers using the rear speakers and/or headphones.
1. Select .
2. Select CabinTalk.
u
Select Speakers to broadcast to the rear
speakers.
u Select Headphones to broadcast to
headphones.
u Select Mic is On to mute your voice.
■
How to use
1CabinTalk
TM*
You can also switch to the CabinTalk screen by
selecting CabinTalk on the front control panel for
the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system.
2 Front Control Panel Operation P. 391
When Speakers is selected, you can adjust the
speaker volume by turning the volume knob.
Models with center speaker
Models with center speaker
Models without center speaker
Models with center speaker
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 506 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
507
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving................................... 508
Towing a Trailer................................ 514
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 524
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 526
Automatic Transmission ................... 533
Shifting.................................... 534, 536
Auto Idle Stop
*
................................ 544
ECON Mode .................................... 549
Intelligent Traction Management
*
.... 550
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System............... 552
Agile Handling Assist ....................... 554
Blind spot information System
*
........ 555
LaneWatch
TM
*
.................................. 558
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-
VTM4
TM
) AWD System
*
.................. 560
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
with Tire Fill Assist.......................... 561
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 563
Honda Sensing® ................................ 565
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ....................................... 568
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 580
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 593
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
System ....................................... 602
Front Sensor Camera ....................... 607
Radar Sensor.................................... 609
Braking
Brake System ................................... 610
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 612
Brake Assist System ......................... 613
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 614
Parking Sensor System
*
................... 616
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
..................... 621
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 625
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 627
How to Refuel ................................. 628
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
CO
2
Emissions................................ 630
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 507 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
508
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 662
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 508 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
509
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 511
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 194
2 Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions
P. 200
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 191
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 192
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 509 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
510
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 80
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 510 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
511
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,173 lbs (532 kg).
The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,340 lbs (608 kg).
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 720
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 720
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Second row captain seat models
Second row bench seat models
All models
Label Example
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 511 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
512
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 512 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
513
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer:
See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your
vehicle is designed to tow a tailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 514
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
1,173 lbs
(532 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
873 lbs
(396 kg)
Example2
Max Load
1,173 lbs
(532 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
423 lbs
(192 kg)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 513 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
514
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Do not exceed the maximum allowable
weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in
or on it shown in the table.
Towing loads in excess of this can seriously
affect vehicle handling and performance and
can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions:
• Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back.
• Each occupant weights 150 lbs (68 kg).
• Each occupant has 17.6 lb (8 kg) cargo in the cargo area.
Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and
maximum tongue load.
■
Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then
measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or
tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo
distribution.
Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional
information.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600
miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 720
3
WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Total Load
Number of
occupants
AWD models with
ATF cooler
AWD models
without ATF cooler
2WD models
2 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
3 4,750 lbs (2,155 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg)
4 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)
5 4,250 lbs (1,928 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg)
6 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 2,500 lbs (1,134 kg) 2,500 lbs (1,134 kg)
7 2,500 lbs (1,134 kg) 2,250 lbs (1,021 kg) 2,250 lbs (1,021 kg)
8 Towing not recommended
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 514 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
515
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Continued
Driving
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately:
Boat trailers: 5 – 15% of the total trailer
weight
Other trailers: 10 – 15% of total trailer weight
Tongue Load
Tongue Load
Number of
occupants
AWD models with or without
ATF cooler
2WD models
2 500 lbs (227 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
3 475 lbs (215 kg) 325 lbs (147 kg)
4 450 lbs (204 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
5 375 lbs (170 kg) 275 lbs (125 kg)
6 250 lbs (113 kg) 240 lbs (109 kg)
7 125 lbs (57 kg) 115 lbs (52 kg)
8 Towing not recommended
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 515 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
516
Driving
■ How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale
Check each weight in the order indicated as shown.
Refer to the table on the right for each weight’s limit except for the tongue load.
2 Tongue load P. 515
• If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2.
• The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
• To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6.
• Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information.
1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale
Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who
watches the scale is needed as all occupants should
stay in the vehicle.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then
measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or
tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo
distribution.
Weight limit for 2WD models AWD models
Front gross axle
2,734 lbs
(1,240 kg)
2,855 lbs
(1,295 kg)
Gross vehicle
5,545 lbs
(2,515 kg)
5,842 lbs
(2,650 kg)
Rear gross axle
2,965 lbs
(1,345 kg)
3,142 lbs
(1,425 kg)
Gross combined
8,025 lbs
(3,640 kg)
9,755 lbs
(4,425 kg)
1. Front gross axle weight.
2. Gross vehicle weight.
4. Gross combined weight.
3. Rear gross axle weight.
5. Hitched trailer weight.
6. Unhitched trailer weight.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 516 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
517
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment.
To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Honda equipment
whenever possible.
■ Trailer brakes
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more:
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not
attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower
braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.
The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake controllers.
Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer
brake controller following the trailer brake
controller manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake controller
may increase the distance it takes for you to
stop your vehicle when towing a trailer.
■
Towing Equipment and Accessories
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and
setup of the equipment.
Improper installation and setup can affect the
handling, stability, and braking performance of your
vehicle.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
Trailer packages and products:
•
Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.
•
Wiring harness kit
•
Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included)
2 Trailer brakes P. 517
•
Automatic transmission cooler
Are available at a dealer.
1Trailer brakes
The 4-pin gray connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the parking brake
pedal.
Electric Brake
(Brown)
Ground (Black)
+B (Light Green)
(20A)
Stop (Violet)
Trailer brake controller
connector’s terminals:
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 517 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
518
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
The trailer hitch harness is used to install the
controller for the electric trailer brakes.
Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine
compartment sub fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B
P. 710
Electric Brake
(Brown)
Brake (20A)
(Blue)
Ground
(Black)
Brake Lights
(Sky Blue)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 518 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
519
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.
They are designed for your vehicle.
■ Hitches
Read the trailer manufacturer’s instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for
the height of the trailer you will be towing.
■ Weight distribution hitches
Your vehicle is designed to tow without the need for a load distributing hitch. If you
wish to use one, please consult your trailer maker for proper installation and set-up.
Improper set-up could degrade the handling, stability, and braking performance of
your vehicle.
1Trailer light
The trailer lighting connector is located behind the
left side panel in the cargo area.
Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the
correct connector and pins.
+B Trailer Main
(Red)
+B Trailer Charge
(Sky Blue)
+B ELEC Brake
(Brown)
IG2 HAC
(Light Green)
Back Light
(Brown)
Trailer Small Light
(Red)
Stop Light
(Beige)
Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes:
Right Turn Signal
(Green)
Left Turn Signal
(Blue)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 519 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
520
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■ Sway control
This device can be used if your trailer tends to sway. Your trailer maker can tell you
what kind of sway control you need and how to install it. Improper installation could
degrade the handling and stability of your vehicle.
■ Trailer mirrors
Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a
trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the
trailer creates a blind spot.
■ Automatic transmission cooler
An additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler is required to keep the
transmission from overheating when towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg). You
can get the additional ATF cooler at a dealer.
AWD models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 520 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
521
uuTowing a TraileruTrailer Stability Assist
Driving
Trailer Stability Assist
Helps to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer severely sways.
■ How trailer stability assist works
When the vehicle and trailer become unstable while driving, trailer stability assist
determines the cause. If the trailer oscillation is detected as the cause, and the
swaying increases, the system applies the brakes or controls engine output to reduce
vehicle speed.
Both the vehicle and trailer brake lights come on automatically if you brake to
reduce vehicle speed.
1Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer stability assist is not a function that prevents
the vehicle and trailer from swaying. Avoid high
speeds, abrupt steering, improper trailer load, and
sudden braking to keep the trailer from swaying.
When swayed too severely, the system becomes
ineffective, and you may lose control of your vehicle,
causing the trailer to roll over or get damaged.
2 Driving Safely with a Trailer P. 522
Trailer towing sway is caused by:
•
Crosswinds
•
Improper towbar down load
•
Excessive Speed
The VSA® system indicator blinks during the trailer
stability assist operation.
2 VSA® Operation P. 552
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 521 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
522
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving
Driving Safely with a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 514
• When towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg), use of gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher is recommended.
u Towing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or
steep uphill.
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires.
• Turn off the Auto Idle Stop system using the Auto Idle Stop OFF button. The
trailer weight can affect your vehicle's brake effectiveness if Auto Idle Stop is
activated on a hill while towing a trailer.
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the
(D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.
■
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
■
Towing Speeds and Gears
■
Turning and Braking
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Operating speed when towing a trailer must not
exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
1Towing Speeds and Gears
When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do
not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect
vehicle handling.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 522 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
523
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (Hot) mark, turn off the
heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
and reduce speed. Pull to the
side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
• Shift to the position if the transmission shifts frequently.
• Change the gear position to (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
If the vehicle tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, keep the transmission
in
(D. This prevents damage to the transmission.
If the vehicle tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, keep the transmission
in
(D and do not use the sequential shift mode in (S. This prevents damage to the
transmission.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 714
■
Driving in Hilly Terrain
■
Retrieving a Boat
Automatic transmission models with shift lever
D4
Automatic transmission models with electronic gear selector
Automatic transmission models with shift lever
Automatic transmission models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 523 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
524
Driving
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 511
• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 532
Spinning the tires excessively can also damage the
Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4
TM
) system.
3
WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off
pavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers could be
seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 524 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
525
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Driving
Avoiding Trouble
• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
• Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually
the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it
before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it.
Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around.
Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 525 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
526
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet
(2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 696
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Brake Pedal
Models with electronic gear selector
Models without electronic gear selector
All models
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 526 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
527
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Put the transmission into (P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
■
Stopping the Engine
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before starting the engine again.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 163
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 527 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
528
Driving
You can remotely start the engine on using the smart entry remote.
■ To start the engine
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.
■
Remote Engine Start
*
1Remote Engine Start
*
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
•
You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the driver information interface.
•
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
•
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can
rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly
enclosed areas.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Never use the remote engine starter with
the vehicle parked in a garage or other
areas with limited ventilation.
Press the button, then press and
hold the button
Some exterior lights flash once.
Go within the range,
and try again.
LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Some exterior lights
flash six times if the
engine runs successfully.
Some exterior lights will
not flash if the engine
runs unsuccessfully.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 528 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
529
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
■ To stop the engine
1Remote Engine Start
*
•
The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is
unlocked.
•
You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
•
Another registered smart entry remote is in the
vehicle.
•
There is any antenna failure.
•
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The telematics
*
unit malfunctions.
•
The security system alarm is not set.
The engine may stop while it is running if:
•
You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the smart entry remote.
•
The engine is stopped by using the smart entry
remote.
•
There is any antenna failure.
•
The security system alarm is not set.
•
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is
unlocked.
•
Any door is open.
•
The telematics
*
unit malfunction.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The battery is low.
Press and hold the
button for
one second.
Go within the range,
and try again.
The exterior lights will not flash when the remote
is out of the smart entry system range.
The engine will not stop.
The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops
successfully.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 529 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
530
Driving
1Remote Engine Start
*
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on if there
is a problem with the emissions control systems.
•
You press the shift lever release button.
•
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
•
The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
•
The seat ventilation is activated
*
.
When it is cold outside:
•
The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
•
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters
*
are
activated.
•
The seat heaters
*
and heated steering wheel
*
are
activated.
2 Heated Steering Wheel
*
P. 227
2 Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation
*
P. 225, 226
Models with shift lever
Models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 530 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
531
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button
simultaneously.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 610
3. Put the transmission into (D. Select (R when reversing.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into
(D,
*
, (S
*
, or (L
*
when facing uphill, or (R when
facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the transmission position is
changed from
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to
drive.
When the engine was started using the smart entry
remote
*
When the engine was started using the smart entry remote
*
When the engine was started in any case
D4
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 531 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
532
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
■
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not change the gear position while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under
these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not change the gear position to
(N, as you will
lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 532 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
533
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
Driving
Automatic Transmission
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 532
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 533 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
534
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
Models with shift lever
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Park
Used when parking or starting
the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 6th
automatically)
Low
●
Strong engine power when
climbing and strong engine
braking when going down steep
hills.
Drive (D4)
Press the button while the shift
lever is in
(D.
Used when:
●
Going up or down hills
D4
Release Button
Button
D4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 534 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
535
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the gear position indicator to check the gear
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When the engine speed is increased while the shift
lever is in
(N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may be cut
off even without the engine speed entering the
tachometer’s red zone.
Tachometer’s Red Zone
Gear Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)
Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 535 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
536
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the gear position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift button positions
Models with electronic gear selector
1Shifting
To prevent malfunction and unintended
engagement:
•
Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons.
•
Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift
buttons.
•
Do not let passengers or children operate the shift
buttons.
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
driver information interface when you depress the
accelerator pedal with the gear position in
(N.
Change the gear position to
(D or (R with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 96
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P
is shown
on the gear position Indicator.
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive/S Position
Each time you press the button, the mode
switches between Drive and S position mode.
Used for:
●
Normal driving (gears change between 1st
and 9th automatically)
●
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
●
Automatically changing gears between 1st
and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
●
Driving in the sequential mode
D/S
Drive
S Position
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 536 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
537
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
(P (parking) button
Park your vehicle in a safe place with the
power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and
press the
(P button to put the transmission in
Park.
The indicators on the sides of the
(P button
come on.
1Shifting
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(−22°F/−30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
(P Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 537 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
538
Driving
■
Shift Operation
1Shift Operation
NOTICE
When you change (D to (R and visa versa, depress
the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then
select the intended gear position while maintaining
brake pressure.
Use the gear position indicator and the shift button
indicator to check the gear position before selecting
a shift button.
If the indicator of the currently selected gear position,
or all the gear position indicators are blinking
simultaneously, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
When the engine speed is increased while the
transmission is in
(N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may
be cut off even without the engine speed entering
the tachometer’s red zone.
From the audio/information screen, you can choose
to have the system activate a beeper when you
change to
(R.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Gear Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)
Tachometer’s Red Zone
Press the (P button.
Pull back the (R button.
Press the
(N button.
Press the button.
Each time you press the button,
the mode switches between Drive
and S Position mode.
D/S
Shift Button
Indicator
M (sequential mode)
Indicator
Sequential Mode Gear
Selection Indicator
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 538 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
539
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
In freezing or sub-freezing conditions, the electronic gear selector response may be
slow.
Always depress the brake pedal before changing the gear position to
(P, and
confirm that (P is shown on the gear position indicator before releasing the brake.
■ When opening the driver’s door
If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the gear position
automatically changes to (P.
• The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or
slower.
• The transmission is in other than
(P.
• You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually change the gear position from
(P with the brake pedal
depressed, the gear position will automatically return to
(P once you release
the brake pedal.
■ When turning off the power mode
If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in
other than (P, the gear position automatically changes to (P.
1When opening the driver’s door
You should always select
(P before opening the
driver’s door.
Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.
2 When Stopped P. 614
If you want to drive the vehicle after the gear position
has automatically changed to
(P under the described
conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt,
depress the brake pedal, then change the gear
position.
If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock
the doors.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 539 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
540
Driving
■ If you want to keep the transmission in
(N position [car wash mode]
With the engine running:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Select
(N, then release the button to display (Neutral) (N hold mode on the driver
information interface.
3. Press and hold
(N again for two seconds.
u This puts the vehicle in car wash mode which must be used when your vehicle
is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an
attendant do not remain in the vehicle.
If the ENGINE STOP/START button is pressed
after car wash mode has been activated, the
power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a
message will be displayed on the driver
information interface.
u For 15 minutes the gear position remains
in
(N with the power mode in
ACCESSORY. After that, the position
automatically changes to
(P and the
power mode changes to OFF.
u Manually changing to (P cancels
ACCESSORY mode. The
(P indicator
comes on and the power mode changes
to OFF. You must always shift to (P
when car wash mode is no longer
needed.
1
If you want to keep the transmission in
(N
position [car wash mode]
To keep the vehicle (N position, you can also follow
this procedure:
While the power mode is on, select
(N, and then
within five seconds, press the ENGINE STOP/START
button.
Note that the transmission may not stay in
(N
position while any of the following indicators is on:
•
Transmission system indicator.
•
Malfunction indicator lamp.
•
Charging system indicator.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 540 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
541
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
■ Restriction on selecting a gear position
You cannot select a gear position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.
When the
transmission is in:
1. Under the circumstances
of that:
2. You cannot select:
3. The gear position
remains in/changes to:
How to change the
gear position
(P
The brake pedal is not
depressed.
Other gear position
(P
Release the accelerator
pedal and depress the
brake pedal.
The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at low
speed without the brake pedal
depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at low
speed with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
(N, (D or (S The vehicle is moving forward. (R Stop your vehicle in a
safe place, keep the
brake pedal pressed,
and select the
appropriate gear
position.
(R or (N The vehicle is moving backward. (D, (S
(R, (N, (D or (S The vehicle is moving. (P
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 541 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
542
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 9th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential mode.
■ When the transmission is in (D:
The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the sequential mode
gear selection indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically
switch off, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will go off.
Hold the
(+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push button to return to normal
drive.
■ When the transmission is in (S
The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator
and sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear.
You can cancel this mode by holding the
(+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push
button. When the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator
and sequential mode gear selection indicator go off.
■
Sequential Mode
D/S
D/S
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 542 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
543
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Sequential Mode Operation
1Sequential Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
If the sequential mode gear selection indicator blinks
when you try to shift up or down, this means your
vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear range or the
protection of transmission system is necessary.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
Sequential
Mode Gear
Selection
Indicator
Downshifting when pulling
the paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling
the paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear)
Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 543 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
544
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
*
Driving
Auto Idle Stop
*
To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle
comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The
indicator (green) comes on at this time.
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is
about to move again, or depending on
environmental and vehicle operating
conditions, and the indicator (green) goes off.
2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When
P. 547
The environmental and vehicle conditions that
impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are
varied.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 545,
546
A message associated with Auto Idle Stop
appears on the driver information interface.
2 Indicators P. 80
2 Customized Features P. 433
If the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds
to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function
is in operation.
1Auto Idle Stop
*
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is
specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.
Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type
may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent
Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace
the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified
type. Ask a dealer for more details.
The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:
•
Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when
the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 544 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
545
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
*
Driving
To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press
this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops.
u Auto Idle Stop system will stop and the
indicator (Amber) will come on.
The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the vehicle.
The vehicle stops with the gear position in
(D and the brake pedal depressed.
When you put the transmission into (P, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate,
even if the brake pedal is released.
u If you change the gear position, the engine may automatically restarts.
■ Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The engine coolant temperature is low or high.
• The transmission fluid temperature is low or high.
• The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h) after the engine starts.
• Stopped on a steep incline.
• A gear position other than
(D.
■
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
Press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to restart the
engine from the idling stop.
Auto Idle
Stop
System
Indicator
(Amber)
■
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
Do not open a hood, during idling stop. If the hood is
opened, the engine will not restart automatically.
In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button changes
the power mode to ACCESSORY even while Auto Idle
Stop is in operation. Once in ACCESSORY, the engine
no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard
procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 545 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
546
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
*
Driving
• The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate
Auto Idle Stop.
• The battery charge is low.
• The internal temperature of the battery is 14°F (−10°C) or less.
• The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F
(−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
• The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The rear fan is set to maximum speed.
u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system
*
/rear cooling
*
is in use.
• When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud
*
, or Sand
*
.
■ Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The fan speed is high.
• Altitude is high.
• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between
the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.
• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.
• The rear fan is set to maximum speed.
u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system
*
/rear cooling
*
is in use.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 546 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
547
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
*
Driving
The brake pedal is released.
■ The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• When a steering wheel is operated.
• The transmission is put into
(R or (S, or when it is set from (N to (D.
u If you put the transmission into (P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto
Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you
change the gear position other than
(P. When changing the gear position, the
brake pedal must be firmly depressed.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while
stopped on an incline.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during
a stop.
• The battery charge becomes low.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set
temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
• The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
• The rear fan is set to maximum speed.
u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system is in use.
• When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud
*
, or Sand
*
.
■
The Engine Automatically Restarts When
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When
If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle
Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when
the engine restarts.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 547 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
548
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
*
Driving
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine.
This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.
■
Starting Assist Brake Function
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 548 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
549
uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode
Driving
ECON Mode
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel
economy by adjusting the performance of the
engine, air conditioning system, and cruise
control.
1ECON Mode
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 549 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
550
uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management
*
Driving
Intelligent Traction Management
*
The Intelligent Traction Management optimizes vehicle performance to help you
drive on various surfaces. The system has available modes to select from: Normal,
Snow, Mud
*
, and Sand
*
.
Press the mode button to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select appears
on the driver information interface. When the vehicle is turned off and restarted,
Intelligent Traction Management mode will revert to Normal.
1Intelligent Traction Management
*
Refer to the Off-Highway Driving section for driving
tips and safety precautions.
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 524
Mud
Use when driving on
muddy road or off-
road surfaces.
Sand
Use when driving on
soft, sandy road or
off-road surfaces.
Normal
Provides balanced
driving performance
on most road surfaces.
Mode Button
Snow
Use when driving on
snowy road surfaces.
AWD models
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 550 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
551
uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management
*
Driving
Normal
Provides balanced
driving performance
on most road surfaces.
Snow Button
Snow
Use when driving on
snowy road surfaces.
2WD models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 551 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
552
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 552 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
553
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on and a message on the driver information
interface informs you that the mode is
changed.
Traction control mode can not be changed
during Mud or Sand modes. If you are driving
on mud or sand, Mud or Sand Intelligent
Traction Management modes can also be
used to free a stuck vehicle. On other road
surfaces, change to Normal or Snow mode,
then press and hold the (VSA® OFF) button.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
With the button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
AWD models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 553 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
554
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Driving
Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the
steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during
cornering.
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 554 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
555
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
Continued
Driving
Blind spot information System
*
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle,
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots”.
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you
change lanes.
■ How the system works
1Blind spot information System
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, blind spot information
system has limitations. Over reliance on blind spot
information system may result in a collision.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur.
•
The blind spot information system alert indicator
may not come on due to obstruction (splashes,
etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not
Available driver information interface appearing.
•
The blind spot information system alert indicator
may come on even with the message appearing.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Alert zone range
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:
underneath the
rear bumper
corners
Alert Zone
A
B
C
●
The transmission is in (D.
●
Your vehicle speed is
between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 100 mph (160 km/h)
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 555 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
556
Driving
■ When the system detects a vehicle
Blind spot information System Alert Indicator:
Located near the pillar on both sides.
Comes on when:
• A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your
vehicle.
• You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction
of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds
three times.
1Blind spot information System
*
The blind spot information system alert indicator may
not come on under the following conditions:
•
A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
•
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
•
The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
•
An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.
•
A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The system does not operate when in
(R.
You can turn off the audible alert, or all the blind spot
information system alert using the audio/information
screen.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Turn the system off when towing a trailer.
The system may not work properly for the following
reasons:
•
The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the
radar coverage.
•
The trailer itself can be detected by the radar
sensors, causing the blind spot information system
alert indicators to come on.
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 556 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
557
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
Driving
1Blind spot information System
*
Blind spot information system may be adversely
affected when:
•
Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are detected.
•
An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
•
Driving on a curved road.
•
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
•
The system picks up external electrical interference.
•
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
•
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
•
In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
For a proper blind spot information system operation:
•
Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
•
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
•
Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired,
or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 557 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
558
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Driving
LaneWatch
TM
*
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use
of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
•
Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
•
Your tires are over or under inflated.
•
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 558 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
559
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Driving
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Show Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the
LaneWatch monitor.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 433
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 is farther away.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in
(R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
•
The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
•
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
•
The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
•
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
2
3
1
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 559 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
560
uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4
TM
) AWD System
*
Driving
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4
TM
) AWD System
*
The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4
TM
) AWD system is a full time all
wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amount of
engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
Avoid continuously driving on slippery surfaces where a wheel is likely to spin out,
and do not drive if the AWD indicator starts blinking. Driving continuously under
such conditions can damage the system's torque distribution unit.
If the AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is
too high. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to park, an
idle the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
1
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4
TM
) AWD System
*
NOTICE
Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The intelligent variable torque management
(i-VTM4
TM
) AWD system may not function properly if
tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the
same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 668
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 560 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
561
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire
Fill Assist
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on and a message appears on
the driver information interface.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator
Comes On or Blinks P. 708
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•
Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS audibly and visually informs you of
changes in tire pressure of the individual tire that you
are adjusting using audible and visual indications.
If a change in tire pressure has been significant, the
system beeps and the hazard lights flash continuously
for five seconds when the specified tire pressure is
reached. Stop filling the tire.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 561 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
562
Driving
To select the tire pressure monitor, please follow
the following steps using the buttons on the
steering wheel.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Press the / button repeatedly until
Maintenance appears.
4. Press the ENTER button and select Tire
Pressure by pressing the / button.
5. Press the ENTER button and the tire
pressure appears on the driver information
interface.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in psi.
Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire
has significantly low pressure. The specific tire
is displayed on the screen.
■
Tire Pressure Monitor
1Tire Pressure Monitor
The pressure displayed on the driver information
interface can be slightly different from the actual
pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a
significant difference between the two values, or if
the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator and the
message on the driver information interface do not
go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified
pressure, have the system checked by a dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you
drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a
problem with the TPMS.
3
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 562 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
563
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 563 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
564
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 564 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
565
Continued
Driving
Honda Sensing®
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front
sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview
mirror.
Honda Sensing® has following functions.
■ The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS)
TM
2 P. 568
• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
2 P. 602
■ The functions which require switch operations to activate
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
2 P. 580
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
2 P. 593
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 565 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
566
uuHonda Sensing®u
Driving
■ MAIN Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC and
LKAS. Or press to cancel these systems.
■ LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.
■ RES/+/−/SET Button
Press RES/+ to resume the ACC or increase
the vehicle speed.
Press −/SET to set the ACC or decrease the
vehicle speed.
■ Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC following-interval.
■ CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC.
■
Operation Switches for the ACC/LKAS
MAIN button
Interval
Button
CANCEL
Button
LKAS Button
RES/+ Button
−/SET Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 566 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
567
uuHonda Sensing®u
Driving
You can see the current state of ACC and
LKAS.
a
Indicates that ACC and LKAS are ready to
be activated.
b
Indicates that LKAS is activated and
whether or not traffic lane lines are
detected.
c
Indicates whether or not a vehicle is
detected ahead.
d
Shows the set vehicle speed.
e
Shows the set vehicle interval.
■
Multi-Information Display Content
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 567 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
568
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■ How the system works
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 572
For directions on the proper handling of the radar
sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 609
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when the your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62
mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBS
TM
activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The radar sensor is
behind the emblem.
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
●
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian
detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance
of a collision.
●
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
The camera is
located behind the
rearview mirror.
When to use
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 568 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
569
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ When the system activates
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through the driver
information interface or the audio/information screen setting options.
2 Customized Features P. 125, 433
■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBS
TM
is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 572
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert
Tactile Alert
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 96
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 569 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
570
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The sensors detect a
vehicle
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a collision
with the vehicle ahead of
you.
When in Long, visual and
audible alerts come on at a
longer distance from a vehicle
ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter
distance than in Normal.
In case of an
oncoming vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision has
increased, time to respond
is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
—
Lightly
applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines
that a collision is
unavoidable.
—
Forcefully
applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 570 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
571
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
Press and hold the button until the beeper
sounds to switch the system on or off.
When the CMBS
TM
is off:
• The CMBS
TM
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the driver information
interface reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you start
the engine, even if you turned it off the last
time you drove the vehicle.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
CMBS
TM
indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 572
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 571 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
572
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBS
TM
indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBS
TM
functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 572 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
573
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 573 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
574
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 574 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
575
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 575 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
576
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ Automatic shutoff
CMBS
TM
may automatically shut itself off and the CMBS
TM
indicator comes and stays
on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused CMBS
TM
to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 576 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
577
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
The CMBS
TM
may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 577 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
578
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 578 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
579
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 579 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
580
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC can not be activated if Intelligent Traction
Management setting is snow, sand
*
or mud
*
.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when driving on expressways
or freeways and in good weather
conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below
22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically
cancel and no longer will apply your
vehicle's brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal when conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a
range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
■
Gear positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D or (S
*
The radar sensor is behind
the emblem.
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 580 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
581
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
■ How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the Collision
Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 568
■
Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC is on in the driver
information interface.
Adaptive cruise control is
ready to use.
How to use
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 581 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
582
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC
begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,
distance bars and set speed appear on the
driver information interface.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 585
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by
pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or
off.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface
between mph and km/h.
2 Units P. 120
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
•
On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
•
On roads with sharp turns.
•
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain
the set speed.
•
On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
On when
adaptive cruise
control begins
Press and release
–/SET Button
Set Vehicle
Interval
Set Vehicle
Speed
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 582 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
583
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order
to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 588
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the driver information interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 583 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
584
Driving
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
■ There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alerts even if a vehicle is in ACC range.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes the set speed.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
•
The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
•
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC
detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 125, 433
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 585
A vehicle icon appears on
the driver information
interface.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the driver
information interface.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 584 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
585
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
■ Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected
lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the front grille is dirty.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.
■
ACC Conditions and Limitations
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN
button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 585 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
586
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is
significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 586 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
587
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Continued
Driving
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Radar detects upper section of
an empty carrier truck.
Panel truck,
tanker truck,
etc.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 587 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
588
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about
5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
Press the (Interval) button to change the
ACC following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through short,
middle, long, and extra long following-
interval.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface
between mph and km/h.
2 Units P. 120
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
■
To Set or Change Following-interval
To increase speed
To decrease speed
Interval Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 588 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
589
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Continued
Driving
Determine the most appropriate following-interval setting based on your specific
driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by
local regulation.
The higher vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra
long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
Following-interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec
100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec
137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec
Long
154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec
200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
204 feet
62 meters
2.8 sec
265 feet
81 meters
2.8 sec
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 589 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
590
Driving
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u ACC indicator goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to
automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed
while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button
when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press
the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
MAIN
Button
CANCEL
Button
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled,
you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the
condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then
press the RES/+ button.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 590 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
591
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
button again for one second.
■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
■
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
ACC ON
Cruise
Control ON
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 591 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
592
Driving
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•
When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
•
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 592 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
593
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 96
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the front windshield and
prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition. It is always your responsibility to safely
operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 599
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■
Front sensor camera
Monitors the lane
lines
■
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected
lane.
■
Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to
either of the lane lines.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 593 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
594
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as warning display.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the
system will recover automatically.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 594 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
595
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
■ How to activate the system
1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information
interface.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver
information interface.
The system is activated.
■
When the System can be Used
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 595 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
596
Driving
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
MAIN Button LKAS Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 596 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
597
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
■ The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the driver
information interface change
to contour lines, and the
beeper sounds (if activated).
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 597 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
598
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA® system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 598 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
599
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 599 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
600
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Tire tracksFaded lines Duplicate lines
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 600 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
601
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer.
Lane void of lines at junction
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 601 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
602
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway
altogether.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white or
yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to
detected lane markings without a turn signal
activated, the system, in addition to a visual
alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with
rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help
you remain within the detected lane.
2 Customized Features P. 433
As a visual alert, the
Lane Departure
message
appears on the driver information interface.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 607
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 605
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 602 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
603
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being
turned.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
■
How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 80
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
•
Not driven within a traffic lane.
•
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
•
Driven in a narrow lane.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 603 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
604
Driving
Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the driver
information interface when the system is
on.
■
RDM On and Off
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the driver information
interface or audio/information screen, the system
does not operate the steering wheel and braking.
2 Customization flow P. 126
2 Customized Features P. 433
RDM Button
Indicator
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 604 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
605
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Continued
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■
RDM Conditions and Limitations
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 605 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
606
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 606 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
607
uuHonda Sensing® uFront Sensor Camera
Continued
Driving
Front Sensor Camera
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBS
TM
, is designed to
detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Sensor
Camera
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 607 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
608
Driving
1Front Sensor Camera
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High
message appears:
•
Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
•
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
•
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 608 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
609
uuHonda Sensing® uRadar Sensor
Driving
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is behind the emblem.
1Radar Sensor
Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.
For the CMBS
TM
to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by using the safety
support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 CMBS
TM
On and Off P. 571
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following
situations, the radar sensor may not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
•
Your vehicle drives through deep water or is
submerged in deep water
•
Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,
or embankment that could jar the radar sensor
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor
is located behind
the emblem.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 609 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
610
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Depress the parking brake pedal down with
your foot.
To release:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Depress the parking brake.
■
Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release
Parking Brake appears on the driver information
interface.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 610 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
611
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 613
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 612
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 611 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
612
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake
pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to
press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel
the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the wrong size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, there is a
possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
•
You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
•
The tires are equipped with snow chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
•
Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or when
system checks are being performed after the engine
has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
•
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 612 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
613
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 613 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
614
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Change the gear position to
(P.
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P
is shown
on the gear position Indicator.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•
Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•
Changing into (P before the vehicle stops
completely.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 614 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
615
uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
Driving
1When Stopped
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 615 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
616
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles near your vehicle, and the beeper
and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your
vehicle and the obstacle.
■ The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
•
The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
•
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
•
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
•
The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
•
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
•
Thin or low objects.
•
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
•
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Front: Within about 28 in (70 cm) or less
Rear: Within about 26 in (65 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Rear Center Sensors
Within about 47 in (120 cm) or less
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 616 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
617
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Continued
Driving
■ Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on when the system is on.
The front corner, rear center and rear corner
sensors start to detect an obstacle when the
transmission is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the transmission is not in
(P,
and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8
km/h).
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 617 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
618
Driving
■ Screen Operation
You can switch between split view off and
split view on by touching the split screen tab.
1Screen Operation
The split screen tab disappears, and the split view
returns to the last camera view mode under the
following conditions:
•
If the parking sensor system is turned off.
•
If there is a malfunction in the system.
Split Screen
Tab
Split View Off
Split View On
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 618 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
619
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Continued
Driving
■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles becomes shorter
*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —
Rear: About 47-26 in
(120-65 cm)
Blinks in Yellow
*1
Short
Rear: About 26-19 in
(65-50 cm)
Front: About 28-19 in
(70-50 cm)
About 26-19 in
(65-50 cm)
Blinks in Amber
Very short
About 19-16 in
(50-40 cm)
About 19-16 in
(50-40 cm)
Continuous
About 16 in
(40 cm)
About 16 in
(40 cm)
Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 619 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
620
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button flashes.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
■
Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you set the gear position to
(R, the indicator
in the parking sensor system button blinks as a
reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 620 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
621
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Continued
Driving
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
3
CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 621 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
622
Driving
The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 624
• The transmission is in (R.
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
■
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
•
An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle's rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor's scope.
•
Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
•
A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25 km/h).
•
The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
•
Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
•
When there is bad weather.
•
Your vehicle is on an incline.
•
Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
•
Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
Have a vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 622 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
623
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
■
When the System Detects a Vehicle
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber
when the transmission is in
(R, mud, snow or ice,
etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the
sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the
bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly
clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in
(R,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission
in
(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Normal View Wide View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 623 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
624
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Camera.
4. Select Rear Camera.
5. Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
6. Select ON or OFF.
The system can also be turned on and off on
the audio/information screen by pressing the
CTM icon.
■
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Icon
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 624 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
625
Continued
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to a rear view when the gear position is changed to (R.
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off
settings.
2 Customized Features P. 426
You can change the Fixed, Dynamic, Both and OFF
settings.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 20
inches (50 cm)
Tailgate Open
Range
Approx. 39
inches (1 m)
Wide View Mode
Normal View Mode
Top Down View Mode
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 625 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
626
Driving
You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.
Press the selector knob to switch the angle.
Select the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view mode
: Normal view mode
: Top down view mode
• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system,
Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON
and put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of
(R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you
put the transmission into (R.
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Fixed: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into
(R.
Dynamic: Guidelines move according to the steering
wheel direction.
Both: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into
(R and Guidelines move according
to the steering wheel direction.
OFF: Guidelines do not appear.
You can change the Last Used, Normal View and
Wide View settings.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with Display Audio
Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 626 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
627
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some
gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as
ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 627 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
628
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Press the fuel fill door release button.
u The fuel fill door opens.
1How to Refuel
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Press
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 628 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
629
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 716
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 629 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
630
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
• Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 644
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter
Kilometers L per 100 km
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 630 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
631
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 632
Safety When Performing Maintenance..633
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 634
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 635
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 641
Opening the Hood ........................... 642
Engine Compartment Cover............. 643
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 644
Oil Check......................................... 645
Adding Engine Oil............................ 646
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter...647
Engine Coolant................................ 649
Transmission Fluid............................ 651
Brake Fluid....................................... 652
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 652
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 653
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
... 658
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 662
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 663
Tire Labeling .................................... 663
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 665
Wear Indicators................................ 667
Tire Service Life ................................ 667
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 668
Tire Rotation.................................... 669
Winter Tires ..................................... 670
Battery............................................... 671
Remote Transmitter Care................. 673
Remote Control and Wireless
Headphone Care
*
........................... 674
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate
Control System
*
Maintenance
.............676
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 678
Exterior Care.................................... 680
Accessories and Modifications ........ 683
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 631 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
632
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 652
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 662
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 653
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 658
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 638
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 729
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 632 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
633
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot
warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only
you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
•
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 633 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
634
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 634 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
635
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to
ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 635 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
636
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until home screen appears.
3. Select Maintenance by pressing the / button repeatedly and press
ENTER.
4. Select Oil Life by pressing the / button and press ENTER.
5. The engine oil life appears on the screen.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 638
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
3
4
3
4
ENTER Button
Engine Oil Life
(Back)
Button
(Hang-up/
Back) Button
Button
3
Button
4
(Home)
Button
Home Screen
ENTER Button
Models with color
audio system
Models with Display
Audio
Button
3
Button
4
(Home)
Button
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 636 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
637
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
*1:Models with color audio system
*2:Models with Display Audio
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Once you switch the display
by pressing the
*1
/
*2
, or
button, this message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and
serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the
*1
/
*2
,
or button to switch to another
display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over 10
miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
*1
/
*2
, or button to
switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 637 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
638
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
U.S. models
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display
is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 727.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under
-20°F, -29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid
*
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
*4
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
6
●
Replace rear differential fluid
*, *5
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*6
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 638 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
639
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.
Canadian models
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display
is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 43ºC, 110ºF), in very low temperatures (under
-29ºC, -20ºF), replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles).
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 12,000km (7,500 miles), then every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 727.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
0
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid
*
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
*4
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
6
●
Replace rear differential fluid
*,*5
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*6
9
●
Service front and rear brakes
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 639 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
640
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Display the engine oil life.
2 Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information P. 636
3. Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
4. Press the / button to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due
Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
5. Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
6. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display yourself.
You can also reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 433
Models with Display Audio
Button
3
ENTER
Button
Button
4
3
4
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 640 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
641
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Washer Fluid
Radiator Cap
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 641 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
642
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver's side lower corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Pull up the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center)
and raise the hood. Once you have raised
the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible
damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop
function is activated.
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 642 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
643
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover
Maintenance
Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover.
You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work.
Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pins.
Engine Compartment Cover
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 643 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
644
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and
viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive
the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil
●
Honda Genuine Motor Oil
●
Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
The following seal indicates the oil is energy
conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 644 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
645
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.
Lower Mark
Upper Mark
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 645 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
646
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 646 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
647
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Drain Bolt
Washer
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 647 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
648
Maintenance
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the oil filter base, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
5.7 US qt (5.4 ℓ)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Oil Filter
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 648 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
649
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Continued
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 643
3. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below
this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant
should be increased.Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use
another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or
fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
MIN
Reserve Tank
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 649 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
650
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 643
3. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system. Do not push the cap down
when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Radiator
Cap
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 650 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
651
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.
■
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1
Specified fluid: Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 or higher
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle limited warranty.
Do not mix Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) with
other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF-
TYPE 3.1 (or higher) may adversely affect the
operation and durability of your vehicle’s
transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) is
not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.
Models with shift lever
Models with electronic gear selector
Models with shift lever
Models with electronic gear selector
All models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 651 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
652
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Open the cap and check the amount of
window washer fluid.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent
lime scale build up.
Models without washer level sensor
Models with washer level sensor
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 652 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
653
Continued
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 643
2. Remove the clips.
3. Remove the air intake duct.
High beam headlight: LED type
*
60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
*
Low beam headlight: LED type
■
High Beam Headlights
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
High beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with LED high beam headlights
Models with halogen high beam headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Clips
Air Intake Duct
Driver side
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 653 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuDaytime Running Lights and Parking Lights
654
Maintenance
4. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
5. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Daytime Running Lights and Parking Lights
Daytime running lights and parking lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Lights
Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
1Headlight Bulbs
Remove the clip using Phillips-head screwdriver.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Center pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
Both sides
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 654 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
655
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the screws, pull the inner fender
back.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Fog Lights
*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber)
Screws
Bulb
Socket
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 655 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
656
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Maintenance
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear
Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise.
5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.
6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.
Brake/Taillight: LED
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber)
1Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal
Light Bulbs
Brake/taillights, rear side marker lights, and back-up
lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Bolts
Bulb Socket
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 656 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
657
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight and Back-Up Lights
Maintenance
Brake/Taillight and Back-Up Lights
Brake/taillight and back-up lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Lights
Rear license plate lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 657 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
658
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab.
Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw
driver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
Lock Tab
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 658 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
659
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
5. Remove the retainers from the wiper blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new wiper blade.
u Correctly align the wiper blade
protrusion and the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then
push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Retainer
Blade
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 659 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
660
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with
the indent.
3. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and
mount to a new rubber blade.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the
rear window.
Blade
Retainer
Rubber
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 660 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
661
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 661 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
662
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 667
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 662 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
663
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described as shown.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a
The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b
The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c
The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d
The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P235/60R18 102V
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
235: Tire width in millimeters.
60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
102: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 663 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
664
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 664 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
665
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 665 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
666
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 666 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
667
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 667 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
668
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 668 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
669
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information
interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Rotation Mark
Front
Front
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 669 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
670
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Super Z LT ZT735
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 670 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
671
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,
the driver information interface will display a
warning message. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
To access the battery terminals:
1. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 643
2. Remove the clips using a Phillips-head screwdriver, then remove the air intake
duct.
2 High Beam Headlights P. 653
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 247
• The clock resets
*
.
2 Clock P. 136
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 671 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
672
uuBatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
Charging the AGM Battery
AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible
charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is
charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to
charge your vehicle’s AGM battery, consult a dealer.
Models without Auto Idle Stop
Models with Auto Idle Stop
1Battery
The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically
designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.
Using a battery other than this specified type may
shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop
from activating. If you need to replace the battery,
make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer
for more details.
Models with Auto Idle Stop
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 672 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
673
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
3
WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 673 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
674
Maintenance
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care
*
Replacing the Battery
If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the Blu-ray/DVD
rear entertainment system, replace the batteries.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Make sure to replace the batteries with the
correct polarity.
■
Remote Control
Models with Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system
1Replacing the Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Make sure to replace the two batteries at once.
Battery type: AAA
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 674 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
675
uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care
*
uReplacing the Battery
Maintenance
If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphone, replace the battery.
1. Remove the screw.
2. Open the cover.
3. Make sure to replace the batteries with the
correct polarity.
■
Wireless Headphone
Battery type: AAA
Cover
Battery
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 675 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
676
Maintenance
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
1Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance
NOTICE
Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 77
2 Specifications P. 720
Canadian models
Caution
Flammable Refrigerant
Requires Registered
Technician to Service
Air Conditioning
System
:
:
:
:
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 676 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
677
uuHeating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
MaintenanceuDust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system
*
/
climate control system
*
deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 677 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
678
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or
cause a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Loop
■
Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front
sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor
*
.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 678 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
679
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The front and second row passenger’s floor
mats hook over floor anchors, which keep
them from sliding forward. To remove a mat
for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the
unlock position. When reinstalling the mat
after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock
position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.
To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
1Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 679 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
680
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
If you use a conveyor type automatic car wash, keep the transmission in
(N position.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 540
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.
When using an automated car wash that pulls the
vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure vehicle is
in car wash mode.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in
(N
position [car wash mode] P. 540
Air Intake Vents
Models with electronic gear selector
Models with electronic gear selector
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 680 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
681
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 681 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
682
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 682 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
683
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 709
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 683 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
684
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 684 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
685
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools.................................. 686
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 687
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 695
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................696
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 697
Shift Lever Does Not Move
*
............ 699
Jump Starting.................................... 700
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 703
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears......705
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 705
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 706
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On ................................................. 707
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 707
If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator
Comes On or Blinks........................ 708
If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks
along with the Warning Message
*
.....708
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 709
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 713
Emergency Towing........................... 714
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 715
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel
Container ...................................716
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate.. 717
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 685 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
687
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Change the gear position to
(P.
2. Put the transmission into
(P.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Models with electronic gear selector
Models with shift lever
All models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 687 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
688
Handling the Unexpected
1. Push the rear edge of the handle on the
floor lid and open the lid.
2. Pull and remove the cover. Take the wheel
nut wrench and jack-handle bar out of the
rear side compartment.
3. Loosen the strap, then take the jack out.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire
NOTICE
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.
Handle
Cover Wheel Nut Wrench
Jack
Handle Bar
Strap
Jack
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 688 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
689
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Remove the cover and the rubber plug on
the cargo area lining to access the shaft
for the spare tire hoist.
5. Put the wheel nut wrench with the jack
handle bar on the hoist shaft.
Turn the wrench to the left to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
6. Keep turning the wheel nut wrench to
create slack in the cable.
7. Remove the bracket from the spare tire.
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is
specially adapted to fit the hoist shaft. Do not use any
other tool.
Cover
Rubber Plug
Jack
Handle Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench
Bracket
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 689 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
690
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
8. Place a wheel block or rock in front and
rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
9. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side
up) under the vehicle body, near the tire
that needs to be replaced.
10. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 690 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
691
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
•
Do not use while the engine is running.
•
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•
Use only at the jacking points.
•
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jacking
Points
Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 691 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
692
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 692 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Continued
693
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap and place the flat
tire face up under the hoist.
2. Insert the hoist bracket into the center hole
of the flat tire.
3. Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise
to take up the hoist cable slack.
Make sure the bracket is seated in the
center hole of the flat tire.
4. Turn the wheel nut wrench with the jack
handle bar clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the vehicle and
you hear the hoist click.
5. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
cargo area.
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the jack and tools securely before
driving.
Center Cap
Wheel Nut Wrench
Jack Handle
Bar
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 693 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
694
Handling the Unexpected
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure
Monitor Problem appears on the driver information interface, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the
driver information interface and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after
a few miles (kilometers).
■
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Spare Tire
1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 694 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
695
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the driver information interface.
●
If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 696
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 171
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●
If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 671
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 709
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with a
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 163
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 110
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 713
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 714
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 700
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 695 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
696
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the ENGINE START/
STOP button is flashing. The buttons on
the smart entry remote should be facing
you.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
ENGINE START/STOP button changes
from flashing to on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 696 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
697
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
The gear position automatically changes to
(P after the vehicle comes to a complete
stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
The gear position automatically changes to
(P after the vehicle comes to a complete
stop. Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the
brake pedal to change the mode VEHICLE OFF.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine
to be turned off.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving, the beeper sounds.
Models with electronic gear selector for U.S. models
Models with electronic gear selector for Canadian models
Models with shift lever
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 697 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
698
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
Models with shift lever for Canadian models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 698 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
699
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
*
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Open the lid of the console compartment.
4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
6. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Cover
Release
Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 699 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
700
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Pull up on the engine compartment cover,
remove it from the pins.
2. Remove the holding clips and the air intake
duct.
■
Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Pin
Engine Compartment Cover
Air Intake Duct
Clip
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 700 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
701
uuJump Startingu
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
3. Pull up on the engine cover, remove it from
the pins.
u Start on the passenger side and lift the
outermost edge of the cover.
u Move towards the driver side while
applying uniform upward pressure.
4. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
5. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15
volts. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
6. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
7. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to
any other part.
8. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
9. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
Pin
Engine Cover
Booster Battery
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 701 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
702
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 702 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
703
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on
the driver information interface.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the mark may damage the engine.
Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When
Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on
the driver information interface may damage the
engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
H
H
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 703 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
704
Handling the Unexpected
■ Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle goes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, remove the engine compartment
cover then add coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 643
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve Tank
MAXMIN
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 704 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
705
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
■ Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the warning appears
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for approximately three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 645
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning.
u The warning disappears: Start driving again.
u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately
stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 705 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
706
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 706 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
707
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 707 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
708
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS
with Tire Fill Assist or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator
blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along
with the Warning Message
*
■ Reasons for the indicator to blink
The transmission is malfunctioning.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
• Immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
• Change the gear position to
(N after starting the engine.
u Check if the (N position in the instrument panel and the indicator
on the (N button light/blink.
2 Starting the Engine P. 526
1If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist provides visual and audible
assistance during tire pressure adjustment. With the
power mode in ON, while you adjust tire pressure up
or down, the system alerts you as follows:
Below recommended pressure: The beeper
sounds and exterior lights flash once every five
seconds.
At recommended pressure: The beeper sounds
and exterior lights flash rapidly for ~ five seconds.
Above recommended pressure: The beeper
sounds and lights flash twice every three seconds.
1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the
Warning Message
*
You may not be able to start the engine.
Make sure to set the parking brake when parking
your vehicle.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow
your vehicle.
2 Emergency Towing P. 714
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 708 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
709
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
and check to see if any applicable fuse is
blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Located near the passenger's side damper
house. Push the tabs to open the box.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse
Box Type A
Tab
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
− (70 A)
RR BLOWER 30 A
ABS/VSA MTR 40 A
ABS/VSA FSR 20 A
MAIN FAN 30 A
MAIN FUSE 150 A
2
SUB FAN 30 A
WIP MTR 30 A
WASHER 20 A
SUNSHADE
*
(20 A)
ENGINE MOUNT 30 A
FR BLOWER 40 A
A/C INVERTER
*
(30 A)
STANDARD AMP
*1
(30 A)
RR DEF 40 A
− (30 A)
PREMIUM AMP
*
(20 A)
3
− −
− −
− −
− −
4 PARKING LIGHT 10 A
5 CRUISE CANCEL SW
*
(7.5 A)
6 STOP LIGHT 10 A
7 FI SUB VSS
*
(10 A)
*1:Models with Display Audio
*2:Models with color audio system
8L H/L LO 10 A
9 − −
10 R H/L LO 10 A
11 IGPS 7.5 A
12 INJECTOR 20 A
13 H/L LO MAIN 20 A
14 FI-ECU BACKUP
*
(10 A)
15 FR FOG
*
(10 A)
16 HAZARD 15 A
17
PASSENGER P/
SEAT(RECLINE)
*
(20 A)
18 PASSENGER P/SEAT(SLIDE)
*
(20 A)
19 PREMIUM AMP
*
(20 A)
20 MG CLUTCH 7.5 A
21 MAIN RLY 15 A
22 FI SUB 15 A
23 IG COIL 15 A
24 DBW 15 A
25 SMALL/STOP MAIN 20 A
26 BACK UP 10 A
27 HTD STRG WHEEL
*
(15 A)
28 HORN 10 A
29 RADIO
15 A
*1
20 A
*2
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 709 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
710
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse
Box Type B
Tab
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
ST CUT1
*
(40 A)
4WD
*
(20 A)
IG MAIN 30 A
IG MAIN2 30 A
P/TAILGATE MOTOR
*
(40 A)
F/B MAIN2 60 A
F/B MAIN 60 A
EPS 60 A
2 TRAILER MAIN (30 A)
3 TRAILER E-BRAKE (20 A)
4 BATTERY SENSOR 7.5 A
5 H/L HI MAIN 20 A
6 P/TAILGATE CLOSER
*
(20 A)
7 CTR ACC SOCKET 20 A
8 RR ACC SOCKET
*
(20 A)
9 FR WIPER DEICER
*
(15 A)
10 ACC/IG2_MAIN 10 A
11 TRAILER CHARGE (20 A)
12 IDLE STOP ST CUT
*
(30 A)
13 IDLE STOP
*
(30 A)
14 IDLE STOP
*
(30 A)
15
ELECTRONIC GEAR
SELECTOR
*
(15 A)
16 RR HEATED SEAT
*
(20 A)
17 ST CUT FEED BACK 7.5 A
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 710 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
711
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the outer side of the side panel cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■
Interior Fuse Box Type A
Fuse Box
Fuse Label
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 DRIVER P/WINDOW 20 A
2 DOOR LOCK 20 A
3 SMART 7.5 A
4 PASSENGER P/WINDOW 20 A
5 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A
6 FUEL PUMP 20 A
7 ACG 15 A
8 FR WIPER 7.5 A
9
IG1 SMART
*1
7.5 A
ABS/VSA
*2
7.5 A
10 SRS 10 A
11 REAR L P/WINDOW 20 A
12 − −
13 REAR R P/WINDOW 20 A
14 FUEL LID 20 A
15 DR P/SEAT(RECLINE)
*
(20 A)
16 − −
17 FR SEAT HEATER
*
(20 A)
18 INTR LT 7.5 A
19 REAR L DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
20 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
21 DRL 7.5 A
22 KEY LOCK 7.5 A
23 A/C 7.5 A
24 IG1a FEED BACK 7.5 A
*1:Models with Auto Idle Stop
*2:Models without Auto Idle Stop
25 INST PANEL LIGHTS 7.5 A
26 LUMBAR SUPPORT
*
(10 A)
27 PARKING LIGHTS 7.5 A
28 OPTION 10 A
29
BACK LT
*1
7.5 A
METER
*2
7.5 A
30 REAR WIPER 10 A
31
ST MOTOR
*1
7.5 A
MISS SOL
*2
7.5 A
32 SRS 7.5 A
33 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK 10 A
34 DRIVER DOOR LOCK 10 A
35 DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
36 DRIVER P/SEAT(SLIDE)
*
(20 A)
37 R H/L HI 10 A
38 L H/L HI 10 A
39 IG1b FEED BACK 7.5 A
40 ACC 7.5 A
41 REAR L DOOR LOCK 10 A
42 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 711 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
712
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the image.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■
Interior Fuse Box Type B
Models with Auto Idle Stop
Fuse Box
Fuse Label
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
A METER 10 A
B ABS/VSA 7.5 A
C ACG 7.5 A
D MICU 7.5 A
E AUDIO 15 A
F BACK UP 10 A
G ACC 7.5 A
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 712 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
713
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories
off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller and replace it with a new
one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 709 to P. 712.
There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse
box.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 713 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
714
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
All models
2WD models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 714 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
715
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it
into the cover slot as shown in the image,
and remove the cover.
3. Pull the release lever toward you.
u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
■
What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Cover
Release Lever
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 715 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
716
Handling the Unexpected
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press the fuel fill door release button.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it
into the cover slot as shown in the image,
and remove the cover.
4. Remove the funnel from the cover.
5. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
6. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
7. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
8. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Funnel
Cover
Funnel
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 716 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
717
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure:
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while pushing the lever to the right using a
flat-tip screwdriver.
■
What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.
Cover
Lever
Models with power tailgate
Screwdriver
Lever
Models without power tailgate
Screwdriver
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 717 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
718
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 718 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
719
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 720
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 722
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 723
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 724
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 725
Warranty Coverages ........................ 727
Authorized Manuals......................... 729
Customer Service Information......... 730
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 719 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
720
Information
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
*1: Models with second row captain seat
*2: Models with second row bench seat
*3: 2WD models
*4: AWD models
Model Pilot
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 2nd Row 2
*1
3
*2
3rd Row 3
Total
7
*1
8
*2
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver's
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver's
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver's
doorjamb
Gross Combined Weight
Rating
U.S.: 8,025 lbs (3,640 kg)
*3
9,755 lbs (4,425 kg)
*4
Canada: 3,640 kg
*3
4,425 kg
*4
■ Air Conditioning
*1: Models with shift lever
*2: Models with electronic gear selector
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity
21.3 – 23.1 oz (605 – 655 g)
*2
23.8 – 25.6 oz (675 – 725 g)
*1
Lubricant Type RL85HM (POE)
Quantity
7.5 – 8.72 cu-in (123 – 143 cm
3
)
*1
7.75 – 9.33 cu-in (127 – 153 cm
3
)
*2
Displacement 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK DILZKR7B11G
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 4 US qt (3.8 L)
Canada: 5.6 US qt (5.3 L)
■ Light Bulbs
*1: Models with shift lever
*2: Models with electronic gear selector
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam)
60 W (HB3)
*1
LED
*2
Fog Lights
*
LED
Front Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber)
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
*
LED
Brake/Taillights LED
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Back-Up Lights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Lights LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights
LED
*
5 W
*
Ceiling Lights
LED
*
5 W
*
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights
*
1.4 W
Door Courtesy Lights
*
3.8 W
Door Inner Handle Lights
*
LED
Door Pocket Lights
*
LED
Beverage Holder Light
*
LED
Foot Lights
*
LED
Console Compartment Light 1.4 W
Glove Box Light 1.4 W
Cargo Area Lights 8 W
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 720 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
721
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Brake Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
■ Rear Differential Fluid
*
■ Transfer Assembly Fluid
*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda ATF DW-1
Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 L)
Specified Honda ATF Type-3.1 or higher
Capacity Change 3.5 US qt (3.3 L)
Specified Honda DPSF-II
Capacity Change 1.92 US qt (1.82 L)
Specified Honda HGO-1
Capacity Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 L)
Models with shift lever
Models with electronic gear selector
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
*1: Models with shift lever
*2: Models with electronic gear selector
Recommended
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 5.4 US qt (5.1 L)
Change
including
filter
5.7 US qt (5.4 L)
Specified Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.91 US gal (7.23 L)
*1
1.96 US gal (7.40 L)
*2
(change including the remaining 0.22 US gal
(0.82 L) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: Models with 18 inch wheel
*2: Models with 20 inch wheel
Regular
Size
245/60R18 105H
*1
245/50R20 102H
*2
Pressure 32 (220 [2.2])
*1
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
]) 35 (240 [2.4])
*2
Compact
Spare
Size T165/80D17 104M
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
18 x 8J
*1
20 x 8J
*2
Compact Spare 17 x 4T
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 721 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
722
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows:
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
*
Automatic Transmission
Number
*
* Not available on all models
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 722 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
723
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements
and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 723 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
724
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 724 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
725
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 725 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
726
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 726 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
727
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 727 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
728
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director,
Light-Duty Vehicle Center,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Attention: Warranty Claim
2000 Traverwood Drive,
Ann Arbor, MI 48105;
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 728 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
729
Information
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 729 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
730
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 100-5E-8A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•
Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 722
•
Date of purchase
•
Odometer reading of your vehicle
•
Your name, address, and telephone number
•
A detailed description of the problem
•
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 730 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
Index
731
Index
Index
A
AAC................................... 263, 316, 322, 325
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 612
AC Power Outlet ...................................... 218
Accessories and Modifications ................ 683
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 217
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)................ 580
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator
(Amber)..................................................... 93
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator
(Green)...................................................... 93
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 649
Engine Oil ............................................... 644
Washer ................................................... 652
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 644
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 207
Front Seats.............................................. 194
Head Restraints....................... 200, 201, 202
Mirrors.................................................... 192
Rear Seats............................................... 204
Second Row Seats................................... 198
Steering Wheel ....................................... 191
third row seat ......................................... 199
Agile Handling Assist............................... 554
Air Conditioning System (Climate
Control System) ...................................... 235
Changing the Mode................................ 235
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 236
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 677
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 236
Sensor ..................................................... 241
Synchronization Mode ............................. 238
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 235
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System) ...................................... 230
Cooling ................................................... 232
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 233
Heating ................................................... 231
Air Pressure ....................................... 663, 721
Airbags ........................................................ 47
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 53
After a Collision......................................... 51
Airbag Care............................................... 59
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 50
Indicator.............................................. 57, 85
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 58
Sensors...................................................... 47
Side Airbags .............................................. 54
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 56
All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator ............... 90
AM/FM Radio .................................... 258, 302
Android Auto............................................ 344
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 612
Indicator.................................................... 84
Apple CarPlay ........................................... 341
Armrest ..................................................... 207
Audio Remote Controls............................ 248
Audio System............................ 244, 251, 269
Adjusting the Sound........................ 256, 296
AM/FM Radio.................................. 258, 302
Android Auto.......................................... 344
Apple CarPlay.......................................... 341
Audio/Information Screen................ 252, 270
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 246
Changing the Screen Brightness .............. 297
Display Setup .................................. 257, 297
Error Messages........................................ 348
File Manager ........................................... 290
General Information ................................ 353
HD Subchannel ....................................... 305
Home Screen........................................... 276
HondaLink®............................................. 333
How to Delete a File................................ 293
How to Transfer a File ............................. 290
How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 284
How to Update with a USB Device........... 288
iPod ................................................ 260, 319
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 298
MP3/WMA/AAC.............. 263, 316, 322, 325
My Honda Music ..................................... 325
Playing a CD............................................ 316
Playing AM/FM Radio .............................. 302
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 266, 329
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
.......................... 306
Playing Social Playlist ............................... 331
Reactivating ............................................ 247
Recommended CDs................................. 354
Remote Controls ..................................... 248
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 731 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
732
Index
Security Code .......................................... 247
Selecting an Audio Source ....................... 298
Siri Eyes Free............................................ 340
Status Area.............................................. 281
System Updates....................................... 284
Theft Protection....................................... 247
Updating Apps ........................................ 282
USB Flash Drives ...................... 263, 322, 357
USB Port.................................................. 245
Wallpaper Setup .............................. 254, 274
Wi-Fi Connection..................................... 338
Audio/Information Screen................ 252, 270
Authorized Manuals................................. 729
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 152
Customize ....................................... 130, 447
Auto High-Beam ....................................... 179
Indicator.................................................... 85
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Amber) .............. 90
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) ............... 90
Auto Idle-stop ........................................... 544
OFF Button .............................................. 545
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ............... 184
Automatic Lighting .................................. 176
Automatic Transmission........................... 533
Creeping ................................................. 533
Fluid ........................................................ 651
Kickdown ................................................ 533
Operating the Shift Button....................... 538
Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 699
Shift Lever Operation ............................... 535
Shifting............................................ 534, 536
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 246
Average Fuel Economy ............................ 116
AWD Torque............................................. 119
B
Battery ...................................................... 671
Charging System Indicator................. 81, 705
Jump Starting.......................................... 700
Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 671
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 39
Beverage Holders ..................................... 215
Blind spot information System ................ 555
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 266, 329
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 455, 480
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment
System ..................................................... 378
Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats ... 399
Auxiliary Console Panels .......................... 380
DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Player Error Messages ... 424
Front Control Panel Operation................. 391
HDMI
TM
Port ............................................ 381
How Much Farther?
TM
............................. 398
Media Servers.......................................... 398
Operating the System.............................. 382
Overhead Screen ..................................... 381
Playable Disc Region Codes ..................... 422
Playable Disc Types.................................. 422
Playable Discs .......................................... 400
Playing a Disc in the Rear......................... 396
Playing a DVD/Blu-ray
TM
........................... 385
Playing a Video Using the HDMI
TM
........... 397
Playing an iPod and a USB Flash Drive in
the Rear ................................................ 396
Playing Apps ........................................... 394
Rear DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Menu ................... 386
Rear System Setup .................................. 392
Recommended Discs ............................... 423
Selecting the App using Front Control
Panel..................................................... 391
Setting the DVD or Blu-ray
TM
Menu ......... 393
System Controls.............................. 385, 395
System Settings....................................... 389
Video Accessibility................................... 383
Wireless Headphones.............................. 379
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 75
Brake System ............................................ 610
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 612
Brake Assist System................................. 613
Fluid ....................................................... 652
Foot Brake .............................................. 611
Indicator ........................................... 80, 707
Parking Brake.......................................... 610
Brake System (Red)
Indicator ................................................. 707
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 188
Bulb Replacement .................................... 653
Back-Up Lights........................................ 657
Brake Lights ............................................ 657
Brake/Taillights........................................ 656
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 654
Fog Lights ............................................... 655
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 732 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
733
Index
Front Side Marker Lights ......................... 654
Front Turn Signal Lights .......................... 655
Headlights .............................................. 653
High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 657
Parking Lights ......................................... 654
Rear License Plate Lights ......................... 657
Rear Side Marker Lights .......................... 656
Rear Turn Signal Lights............................ 656
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights.................................................... 656
Bulb Specifications................................... 720
C
CabinTalk
TM
.............................................. 506
Car Wash Mode........................................ 540
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 76
Carrying Cargo ................................. 509, 511
CD Player .................................................. 316
Certification Label ................................... 722
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 653
Charging System Indicator ................ 81, 705
Child Safety ................................................ 60
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 151
Child Seat ................................................... 60
Booster Seats ............................................ 75
Child Seat for Infants ................................ 62
Child Seat for Small Children .................... 63
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt................................... 69
Larger Children ......................................... 74
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 62
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 64
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 151
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 680
Cleaning the Interior................................ 678
Climate Control System............................ 235
Changing the Mode ................................ 235
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 236
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 677
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 236
Sensors.................................................... 241
Synchronization Mode ............................. 238
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 235
Clock.......................................................... 136
Coat Hook ................................................. 221
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
).................................................. 568
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) Indicator.............................. 93, 94
Compact Spare Tire .......................... 687, 721
Console Compartment ............................. 213
Controls..................................................... 135
Coolant (Engine)....................................... 649
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 650
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 649
Overheating ............................................ 703
Temperature Gauge ................................ 110
Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 533
Cross Traffic Monitor................................ 621
Cup Holders .............................................. 215
Customer Service Information................. 730
Customized Features................ 125, 426, 433
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 182
Dead Battery............................................. 700
Defaulting All the Settings...................... 451
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ......................................... 233, 236
Detachable Anchor .................................... 44
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 723
Dimming
Headlights............................................... 175
Rearview Mirror....................................... 192
Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 645
Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 174
Door Mirrors............................................. 193
Doors......................................................... 139
Auto Door Locking .................................. 152
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 152
Door Open Message.................................. 38
Keys........................................................ 139
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside .................................................... 149
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................. 142
Lockout Prevention System...................... 148
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 665
Driver Information Interface ................... 111
Accessing Content .................................. 113
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 733 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
734
Index
Warning and Information Messages........... 96
Driving....................................................... 507
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 580
Automatic Transmission........................... 533
Braking.................................................... 610
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 524
Shifting Gear ........................................... 536
Starting the Engine .................................. 526
Driving Position Memory System............. 189
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 677
E
Eco Assist® System....................................... 10
ECON Button............................................. 549
Econ Mode
Indicator.................................................... 89
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 86, 707
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 552
Emergency................................................. 714
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 725
Engine
Coolant ................................................... 649
Jump Starting .......................................... 700
Number................................................... 722
Oil ........................................................... 644
Remote Engine Start ................................ 528
Starting ................................................... 526
Engine Compartment Cover .................... 643
Engine Coolant......................................... 649
Adding to the Radiator............................ 650
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 649
Overheating ............................................ 703
Temperature Gauge ................................ 110
Engine Oil ................................................. 644
Adding.................................................... 646
Checking................................................. 645
Displaying Maintenance Minder
Information ........................................... 636
Low Oil Pressure Symbol.......................... 705
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 644
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 171
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 707
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 76
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 680
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 193
F
Features .................................................... 243
File Manager............................................. 290
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 677
Oil........................................................... 647
Flat Tire ..................................................... 687
Floor Mats................................................. 679
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 651
Brake ...................................................... 652
Engine Coolant ....................................... 649
Windshield Washer ................................. 652
FM/AM Radio ................................... 258, 302
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 88
Fog Lights ................................................. 178
Folding Down the Second Row Seat ...... 205
Folding Down the Third Row Seat.......... 206
Foot Brake ................................................ 611
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 50
Front Seats................................................ 194
Adjusting ................................................ 194
Front Sensor Camera ............................... 607
Fuel ..................................................... 25, 627
Economy................................................. 630
Gauge .................................................... 110
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 116
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 84
Range ..................................................... 116
Recommendation.................................... 627
Refueling ................................................ 627
Fuel Economy ........................................... 630
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 25, 628
Unable to Unlock .................................... 715
Fuses ......................................................... 709
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 713
Locations ........................ 709, 710, 711, 712
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 630
Gauge .................................................... 110
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 734 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
735
Index
Information............................................. 627
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 116
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 84
Refueling ................................................ 627
Gauges...................................................... 110
Gear Position Indicator...................... 81, 538
Gear Shift Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 536
Glass (care) ............................................... 681
Glove Box ................................................. 213
H
Handling the Unexpected ....................... 685
Hands Free Access .................................... 155
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 455, 480
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
and Call History............................. 469, 489
Automatic Transferring ........................... 488
Caller’s ID Information ............................ 467
Displaying Messages ............................... 499
Favorite Contacts .................................... 490
HFL Buttons .................................... 455, 480
HFL Menus...................................... 457, 483
HFL Status Display........................... 456, 482
In Case of Emergency ............................. 503
Limitations for Manual Operation.... 456, 482
Making a Call ................................. 474, 492
Options During a Call...................... 479, 495
Phone Setup ................................... 461, 485
Receiving a Call............................... 478, 495
Receiving a Text Message ........................ 497
Ring Tone........................................ 467, 488
Selecting a Phone .................................... 498
Speed Dial ............................................... 470
To Clear the System................................. 468
To Set Up a Text Message Options........... 496
Hazard Warning Button............................... 4
HD Radio
TM
................................................ 305
HDMI
TM
Port .............................................. 381
Head Restraints......................... 200, 201, 202
Headlights................................................. 175
Auto High-Beam...................................... 179
Automatic Operation............................... 176
Dimming ......................................... 175, 182
Operating ................................................ 175
Heated Steering Wheel............................ 227
Heated Windshield Button ...................... 187
Heater (Steering Wheel) .......................... 227
Heaters (Seat) ........................... 224, 225, 226
Heating and Cooling System ................... 230
Cooling ................................................... 232
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 233
Heating ................................................... 231
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 455, 480
High Beam Indicator .................................. 87
Hill Start Assist System ............................. 531
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ............ 452
Honda App License Agreement............... 358
Honda Sensing® .......................................... 26
HondaLink® ............................................... 333
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 722
Engine and Transmission ......................... 722
Vehicle Identification ............................... 722
Illumination Control................................. 188
Button..................................................... 188
Immobilizer System .................................. 163
Indicator.................................................... 88
Indicators .................................................... 80
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber)..... 93
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Green)...... 93
All-wheel drive (AWD) ............................... 90
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 84
Auto High-Beam ....................................... 85
Auto Idle Stop (Amber).............................. 90
Auto Idle Stop (Green)............................... 90
Blind spot information....................... 95, 556
Brake System (Amber) ............................... 80
Brake System (Red)............................ 80, 707
Charging System............................... 81, 705
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)........................................... 93, 94
Econ Mode................................................ 89
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System.. 86, 707
Fog Light................................................... 88
Gear Position............................................. 81
Hazard Warning ........................................ 87
High Beam ................................................ 87
Immobilizer System ................................... 88
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).......... 595
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 735 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
736
Index
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber) ................................................... 91
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Green) .................................................... 91
Lights On................................................... 87
Low Fuel.................................................... 84
Low Oil Pressure Symbol .......................... 705
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 87, 708
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 81, 706
Parking Brake and Brake System .............. 707
Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)... 80
Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) ....... 80
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 92
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 40, 84
Security System Alarm ............................... 88
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 57, 85
System Message ........................................ 89
Transmission System.................................. 82
Turn Signal ................................................ 87
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF... 86, 553
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System............................................. 85, 552
Information............................................... 719
Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 116
Instrument Panel ........................................ 79
Brightness Control ................................... 188
Intelligent Traction Management
System...................................................... 550
Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4) ....................... 560
Interior Lights ........................................... 209
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 192
iPad ........................................................... 356
iPhone ....................................................... 356
iPod ........................................... 260, 319, 356
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 691
Jump Starting ........................................... 700
K
Key Number Tag....................................... 140
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 148
Keys ........................................................... 139
Lockout Prevention.................................. 148
Number Tag ............................................ 140
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 151
Remote Transmitter................................. 147
Types and Functions ................................ 139
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission)....... 533
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 593
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Indicator (Amber) ..................................... 91
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Indicator (Green) ...................................... 91
LaneWatch
TM
............................................. 558
LATCH (Child Seats).............................. 65, 71
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto.......................................... 370
License Information ................................. 373
Lights ................................................ 175, 653
Automatic............................................... 176
Bulb Replacement ................................... 653
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 182
High Beam Indicator ................................. 87
Interior.................................................... 209
Light Switches......................................... 175
Lights On Indicator.................................... 87
Turn Signals ............................................ 174
Load Limits ............................................... 511
Locking/Unlocking ................................... 139
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 152
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 151
From Inside ............................................. 149
From Outside .......................................... 142
Keys........................................................ 139
Using a Key............................................. 148
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 148
Low Battery Charge ................................. 705
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 84
Low Oil Pressure Symbol ......................... 705
Lower Anchors ..................................... 65, 71
Lubricant Specifications Chart ................ 721
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 511
Lumbar Support ............................... 194, 195
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch ...... 195
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 736 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
737
Index
M
Maintenance .................................... 118, 631
Battery.................................................... 671
Brake Fluid.............................................. 652
Cleaning ................................................. 678
Coolant .................................................. 649
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 635
Oil .......................................................... 645
Precautions ............................................. 632
Radiator.................................................. 650
Remote Control ...................................... 674
Remote Transmitter ................................ 673
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 653
Safety ..................................................... 633
Service Items........................................... 638
Tires........................................................ 662
Transmission Fluid................................... 651
Under the Hood...................................... 641
Wireless Headphone ............................... 675
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 81, 706
Map Lights................................................ 210
Maximum Load Limit............................... 511
Meters, Gauges ........................................ 110
Mirrors...................................................... 192
Adjusting ................................................ 192
Door ....................................................... 193
Exterior ................................................... 193
Interior Rearview..................................... 192
Modifications (and Accessories).............. 683
Moonroof ................................................. 169
MP3................................... 263, 316, 322, 325
MP3/WMA/AAC ................ 263, 316, 322, 325
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 625
My Honda Music....................................... 325
N
Navigation ................................................ 117
Now Playing.............................................. 120
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 722
O
Odometer.................................................. 112
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 524
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 644
Adding .................................................... 646
Checking................................................. 645
Displaying Maintenance Minder
Information ........................................... 636
Low Oil Pressure Symbol.......................... 705
Oil Life..................................................... 118
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 644
Viscosity .................................................. 644
Open Source Licenses ............................... 372
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 642
Moonroof................................................ 169
Power Windows ...................................... 166
Tailgate ................................................... 153
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel ....................................... 171
Outside Temperature Display.................. 112
Overheating.............................................. 703
P
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Mode).... 23, 543
Panic Mode ............................................... 165
Panoramic Roof........................................ 170
Parking...................................................... 614
Parking Brake ........................................... 610
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator.................................................. 707
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator (Amber) ..................................... 80
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator (Red) .......................................... 80
Parking Sensor System ............................. 616
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 58
Passing Indicators ..................................... 175
Phone ........................................................ 119
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................ 266, 329
Power Tailgate ......................................... 155
Hands Free Access................................... 155
Power Windows ....................................... 166
Precautions While Driving ....................... 532
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle .................................................. 532
Rain ........................................................ 532
Pregnant Women ....................................... 45
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 687
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 737 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
738
Index
R
Radiator..................................................... 650
Radio (FM/AM).................................. 258, 302
Radio (SiriusXM®)...................................... 306
Radio Data System (RDS).................. 259, 304
Range ........................................................ 116
RDS (Radio Data System).................. 259, 304
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 725
Rear Climate Control System
From the Rear Panel................................. 240
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 186
Rear Entertainment System ..................... 378
Rear Seats.................................................. 204
Second Row Seat............................. 204, 205
Third Row Seat ........................................ 206
Rearview Mirror........................................ 192
Refueling................................................... 627
Fuel Gauge .............................................. 110
Gasoline .......................................... 627, 720
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 84
Regulations ............................... 563, 665, 723
Remote Engine Start ................................ 528
Remote Transmitter.................................. 147
Replacement
Battery..................................... 673, 674, 675
Bulbs ....................................................... 653
Front Wiper Blade Rubber........................ 658
Fuses ............................... 709, 710, 711, 712
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber ......................... 660
Tires ........................................................ 668
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 724
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror .......................... 193
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 602
On and Off.............................................. 604
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator.................................................... 92
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 33
Safety Check ............................................... 38
Safety Labels............................................... 77
Safety Message............................................. 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 39
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 43
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 41
Checking................................................... 46
Detachable Anchor.................................... 44
Fastening .................................................. 42
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 69
Pregnant Women ...................................... 45
Reminder .................................................. 40
Warning Indicator ............................... 40, 84
Seat Heaters.............................. 224, 225, 226
Seat Ventilation........................................ 225
Seats .......................................................... 194
Adjusting ................................................ 194
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 194
Front Seats .............................................. 194
Rear Seats ............................................... 204
Seat Heaters ........................... 224, 225, 226
Seat Ventilation ...................................... 225
Second Row Seat ............................ 204, 205
Third Row Seat ....................................... 206
Second Row Outer Seats Heaters............ 226
Second Row Seat (Folding Down)........... 205
Security System ........................................ 163
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 88
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 88
Select Button...................................... 22, 536
Operation ......................................... 22, 538
Select Lever ........................................ 24, 534
Operation ......................................... 24, 535
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 64
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 251
Sequential Mode...................................... 542
Sequential Mode Operation ................... 543
Setting the Clock...................................... 136
Settings
Arrange Apps ......................................... 123
Show Tachometer................................... 124
Shift Button........................................ 22, 536
Shift Lever .......................................... 24, 534
Does Not Move....................................... 699
Releasing ................................................ 699
Shifting (Transmission) ........ 22, 24, 534, 536
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 43
Show Tachometer .................................... 124
Show/Hide Apps....................................... 122
Side Airbags ............................................... 54
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 56
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 738 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
739
Index
Siri Eyes Free............................................. 340
SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 306
Snow Tires ................................................ 670
Social Playlist ............................................ 331
Spare Tire ......................................... 687, 721
Spark Plugs ............................................... 720
Specifications ........................................... 720
Specified Fuel ................................... 627, 720
Speedometer............................................ 111
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 50
Starting Assist Brake Function ................ 548
Starting the Engine.................................. 526
Does Not Start ........................................ 695
Jump Starting ......................................... 700
Remote Engine Start ............................... 528
Steering Wheel ........................................ 191
Adjusting ................................................ 191
Heater .................................................... 227
Stopping ................................................... 614
Summer Tires............................................ 670
Sunglasses Holder .................................... 222
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 50
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 171
SYNC Mode .............................................. 238
System Message Indicator ......................... 89
System Updates........................................ 284
T
Tachometer............................................... 111
Tailgate ..................................................... 153
Unable to Open....................................... 717
Temperature
Gauge ..................................................... 110
Outside Temperature Display ................... 112
Temperature Gauge ................................. 110
Temperature Sensor ......................... 112, 241
Third Row Seat (Folding Down) .............. 206
Third Row Seat Access.............................. 204
Tie-down Anchors .................................... 228
Time (Setting) ........................................... 136
Tire Fill Assist ............................................ 708
Tire Pressure.............................................. 118
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Indicator.................................................... 87
Tires ........................................................... 662
Air Pressure ..................................... 663, 721
Checking and Maintaining....................... 662
Inspection................................................ 662
Labeling .................................................. 663
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 687
Regulations ............................................. 665
Rotation .................................................. 669
Spare Tire ........................................ 687, 721
Summer .................................................. 670
Tire Chains .............................................. 670
Wear Indicators ....................................... 667
Winter..................................................... 670
Tools .......................................................... 686
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 514
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 517
Load Limits.............................................. 514
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 523
Emergency .............................................. 714
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Indicator.................................................... 87
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist ......................... 561
Indicator.................................................. 708
Tire Fill Assist........................................... 708
Trailer Stability Assist ............................... 521
Transmission ......................... 22, 24, 534, 536
Automatic........................... 22, 24, 534, 536
Fluid........................................................ 651
Gear Position Indicator ...................... 81, 538
Number................................................... 722
Sequential Mode ..................................... 542
Transmission System Indicator ................... 82
Trip Computer .......................................... 115
Trip Meter................................................. 116
Troubleshooting....................................... 685
Blown Fuse...................... 709, 710, 711, 712
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 29
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 30
Emergency Towing.................................. 714
Engine Won’t Start.................................. 695
Noise When Braking.................................. 31
Overheating ............................................ 703
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 687
Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 30, 151
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 699
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 739 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
740
Index
Warning Indicators .................................... 80
Turn Signals............................................... 174
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 87
U
Under-floor Storage Area ........................ 229
Units .......................................................... 120
Unlocking the Doors................................. 142
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside ....................................................... 149
USB Flash Drives........................ 263, 322, 357
USB Port .................................................... 245
V
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Customization.............................. 125
Vehicle Identification Number................. 722
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)............... 552
Off Button ............................................... 553
System Indicator ................................ 85, 552
Ventilation............................................... 236
Ventilation ................................................ 230
Viscosity (Oil)..................................... 644, 721
Voice Control Operation .......................... 299
Audio Commands.................................... 301
Phone Commands ................................... 301
Voice Portal Screen .................................. 300
Voice Recognition.................................... 299
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 254, 274
Warning and Information Messages......... 96
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 705
Warning Labels........................................... 77
Warnings................................................... 117
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 727
Watts......................................................... 720
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 667
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 691
Wi-Fi Connection...................................... 338
Window Washers ..................................... 183
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 652
Switch..................................................... 183
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 166
Windshield................................................ 183
Cleaning ................................................. 681
Defrosting ............................................... 233
Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 236
Washer Fluid ........................................... 652
Wiper Blades ........................................... 658
Wipers and Washers................................ 183
Winter Tires .............................................. 670
Snow Tires .............................................. 670
Tire Chains .............................................. 670
Wipers and Washers................................. 183
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 184
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 658
Front ....................................................... 183
Rear ........................................................ 185
Wireless Charger ...................................... 219
WMA................................. 263, 316, 322, 325
Worn Tires ................................................ 662
20 PILOT-31TG76401.book 740 ページ ２０１９年７月２４日 水曜日 午後３時３２分
owners.honda.com (U.S.)
honda.ca (Canada)
2020 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
© 2019 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved
31TG7640
OM-12712
00X31-TG7-6401 Printed in U.S.A.
